LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
1
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
2
Instrument
cluster
How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of
warning lights and indicators, etc.
3
Operation of
each component
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving, etc.
4
Driving
Operations and advice which are necessary for
driving
5
Interior features
Usage of the interior features, etc.
6
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance
procedures
7
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
8
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.
9
For U.S. owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
Index
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
For your information....................... 8
Reading this manual....................12
How to search..............................13
Pictorial index .............................. 14
1-1. For safe use
Before driving......................26
For safe driving ................... 28
Seat belts............................30
SRS airbags........................38
Front passenger occupant
classification system......... 50
Safety information for
children ............................. 56
Child restraint systems........ 57
Installing child restraints...... 62
Exhaust gas precautions..... 72
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system...............................73
Alarm...................................75
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators........................... 80
Gauges and meters............. 85
Multi-information display ..... 89
Fuel consumption
information........................ 98
3-1. Key information
Keys...................................102
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Side doors .........................106
Back door ..........................114
Smart key system..............126
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats.........................133
Rear seats.........................135
Driving position memory....142
Head restraints..................146
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel...................149
Inside rear view mirror.......151
Outside rear view
mirrors.............................153
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows..................157
Moon roof ..........................161
1
For safety and security
2
Instrument cluster
3
Operation of each
component
3
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
9
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle............. 166
Cargo and luggage............ 175
Vehicle load limits ............. 181
Trailer towing..................... 182
Dinghy towing.................... 198
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch..... 199
Automatic transmission..... 205
Turn signal lever................ 211
Parking brake....................212
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch................ 213
Automatic High Beam ....... 217
Fog light switch ................. 222
Windshield wipers and
washer ............................ 223
Rear window wiper and
washer ............................ 227
Headlight cleaner
switch.............................. 229
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap.................................. 230
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Toyota Safety Sense P......234
PCS
(Pre-Collision System).....241
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert).....254
Dynamic radar cruise
control..............................263
Cruise control ....................275
Intuitive parking assist.......278
Four-wheel drive system ...286
Crawl Control (with Turn
Assist function)................290
Multi-terrain Select.............295
Multi-terrain Monitor...........299
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor).........349
• BSM function.................353
• RCTA function...............357
Driving assist systems.......363
4-6. Driving tips
Off-road precautions..........370
Winter driving tips..............375
4
Driving
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front automatic air
conditioning system ........380
Rear air conditioning
system.............................391
Heated steering wheel/
seat heaters/
seat ventilators................ 395
5-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list................ 399
• Interior lights ................. 400
• Personal lights ..............401
5-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features...... 402
• Glove box......................403
• Console box.................. 404
• Overhead console.........405
• Cup holders .................. 406
• Bottle holders................ 408
• Card holders .................409
• Auxiliary boxes..............409
Luggage compartment
features........................... 410
5-4. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features........412
• Cool box........................412
• Sun visors .....................414
• Vanity mirror..................414
• Clock .............................415
• Outside temperature
display...........................415
• Power outlets ................416
• Wireless charger ...........418
• Armrest..........................426
• Coat hooks....................426
• Assist grips....................427
Garage door opener..........428
Safety Connect..................435
5
Interior features
5
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
9
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.......... 442
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior........... 445
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements................... 448
General maintenance........451
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs......................... 454
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions .....................455
Hood.................................. 457
Engine compartment.........458
Tires..................................471
Tire inflation pressure........ 480
Wheels..............................483
Air conditioning filter.......... 485
Electronic key battery........ 487
Checking and replacing
fuses ............................... 489
Headlight aim.................... 493
Light bulbs.........................495
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...........508
If your vehicle has
to be stopped in
an emergency..................509
7-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed......................510
If you think something is
wrong...............................516
Fuel pump shut off
system.............................517
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds.............................518
If a warning message is
displayed.........................527
If you have a flat tire..........532
If the engine will not
start .................................546
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........548
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.......................551
If your vehicle overheats....554
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................557
6
Maintenance and care
7
When trouble arises
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 560
Fuel information ................ 568
Tire information................. 571
8-2. Customization
Customizable features ...... 582
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize................ 593
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners........................ 596
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting).....................598
Alphabetical index......................602
8
Vehicle specifications
9
For U.S. owners
Index
For vehicles with a navigation system or a multimedia system, refer
to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for information
regarding the equipment listed below.
• Navigation system
• Audio/video system
• Rear seat entertainment system
• Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
7
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
9
8
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
For your information
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment,
including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment
not installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehi-
cles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does
not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance,
repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modi-
fication with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety
or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be
covered under warranty.
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system
● Toyota Safety Sense P
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or spe-
cial instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
Main Owner’s Manual
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
9
Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record
certain data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options
with which it is equipped. These computers do not record conversations or
sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.
● Data transmission
Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Toyota
without notification to you.
● Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunc-
tions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
● Usage of data collected through Safety Connect (U.S. mainland
only)
If your Toyota has Safety Connect and if you have subscribed to those ser-
vices, please refer to the Safety Connect Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
● To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by
Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.
Vehicle data recordings
10
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-
ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except
when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehi-
cle) is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Event data recorder
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
11
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer
before you scrap your vehicle.
Special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These
components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote
control batteries.
Scrapping of your Toyota
Perchlorate Material
WARNING
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that
distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition,
heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal
to children.
12
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Reading this manual
WARNING:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or
serious injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to
or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps
in numerical order.
Indicates the action (push-
ing, turning, etc.) used to
operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Indicates the component or
position being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do
this”, or “Do not let this hap-
pen”.
1
2
3
14
Pictorial index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Pictorial index
■
Exterior
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 106
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 106
Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 157
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . P. 548
Warning lights/warning messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 520, 527
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 114
Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 115
Warning lights/warning messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 520, 527
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 153
Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 153
Folding the mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 153
Driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 142
Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 386
1
2
3
15
Pictorial index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 223
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 227
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 375
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer
*). . . . . . . . . . . . P. 386
Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 443
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 230
Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 230
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 562
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 471
Tire size/inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 566
Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 375
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . .P. 471
Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 532
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 457
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 457
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 562
Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 554
Camera
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 299
Headlights/daytime running lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
Parking lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 222
Turn signal lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211
Stop/tail lights
Hill-start assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 363
License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
Back-up lights
Shifting the shift lever to R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205
Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
4
5
6
7
8
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 495, Watts: P. 567)
*: If equipped
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
Pictorial index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■Instrument panel
Engine switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 199
Starting the engine/changing the modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 199
Emergency stop of the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 509
When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 546
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 527
Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 510
When the shift lever does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 209
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 85
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light. . . . . . P. 85
Warning lights/indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 80
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 518
1
2
3
17
Pictorial index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89
When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 527
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 212
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 212
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 376
Warning buzzer/message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 212, 527
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights. . . . P. 213
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 222
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 223
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 227
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 223, 227
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 470
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 508
Fuel filler door opener. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 232
Hood lock release lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 457
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 149
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 149
Driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 142
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 380
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 380
Rear window defogger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 386
Audio system
*
Navigation system*
*
: Refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
18
Pictorial index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■Switches
Window lock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 157
Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 108
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 157
Driving position memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 142
Outside rear view mirror switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 153
Automatic High Beam switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217
Intuitive parking assist switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 278
Headlight cleaner switch
*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 229
Instrument cluster light control dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 86
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button . . . . . . . . . P. 86
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
19
Pictorial index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Tire pressure warning reset switch*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 472
VIEW switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 303
PCS (Pre-Collision System) switch
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 241
Power back door main switch
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 114
Power back door switch
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 114
*: If equipped
1
2
3
4
5
20
Pictorial index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Audio remote control switches
*
1
Meter control switches*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 91
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 263
LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 254
Cruise control switch
Cruise control
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 275
Dynamic radar cruise control
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 263
Telephone switches
*
1
Talk switch*
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
21
Pictorial index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Heated steering wheel switch
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 396
Front seat heater/ventilator switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 395
Four-wheel drive control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 286
Crawl Control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 290
Multi-terrain Select mode selector switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 295
Crawl Control speed selection switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 290
Center differential lock/unlock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 287
VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 365
Second start mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205
Power mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205
*
1
: Refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*
2
: If equipped
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
22
Pictorial index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■Interior
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 26
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 133
Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 135
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 146
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 30
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 404
Cool box
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 412
Inside lock buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 108
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 402
Bottle holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 402
Rear air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 391
Rear seat entertainment system
*
1, 2
Assist grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 427
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
23
Pictorial index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 151
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 414
Vanity mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 414
Personal/interior lights
*
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 399
Moon roof switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161
“SOS” button
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 435
Garage door opener buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 428
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*
3
: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
25
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
For safety and security
1
1-1. For safe use
Before driving...................... 26
For safe driving................... 28
Seat belts............................ 30
SRS airbags........................ 38
Front passenger occupant
classification system......... 50
Safety information for
children ............................. 56
Child restraint systems........ 57
Installing child restraints...... 62
Exhaust gas precautions..... 72
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system .............................. 73
Alarm................................... 75
26
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Before driving
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.
Floor mat
1
*
2
27
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift
lever in P, fully depress each pedal to
the floor to make sure it does not inter-
fere with the floor mat.
28
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
For safe driving
Adjust the angle of the seat-
back so that you are sitting
straight up and so that you do
not have to lean forward to
steer. (→P. 133)
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so
that your arms bend slightly at
the elbow when gripping the
steering wheel. (→P. 133)
Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint
closest to the top of your ears. (→P. 146)
Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P. 30)
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle. (→P. 30)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
(→P. 57)
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate
position before driving.
Correct driving posture
1
2
Correct use of the seat belts
3
4
29
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside
and outside rear view mirrors properly. (→P. 151, 153)
Adjusting the mirrors
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to
feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to con-
tinue driving and take a break immediately.
30
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so that
it comes fully over the shoulder,
but does not come into contact
with the neck or slide off the
shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the seat-
back. Sit up straight and well
back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
To fasten the seat belt, push the
plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.
To release the seat belt, press
the release button.
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before
driving the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
Fastening and releasing the seat belt (except for the third center
seat)
Release button
1
2
31
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Pull out the tab.
Push tab B into buckle B until a
clicking sound is heard.
Push tab A into buckle A until a
clicking sound is heard.
To release, push the release button
on buckle A.
Push the release button on
buckle A.
Fastening and releasing the third center seat belt
Tab A
Tab B
1
Tab B
Buckle B
2
PRESS
CENTER
Tab A
Buckle A
Release button
3
Releasing and stowing the third center seat belt
Buckle A
1
32
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Push either the mechanical key
or tab A into buckle B.
When releasing and storing the
seat belt, hold the belt while wind-
ing it back gently.
Put tabs A and B together and
stow them in the holder.
To reattach the seat belt, reverse
the above procedure, pulling out
the tabs and inserting tab B into
buckle B.
Buckle B
Tab A
Buckle B
2
Tab A
Tab B
3
33
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing the
release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
The pretensioners help the seat
belts to quickly restrain the occu-
pants by retracting the seat belts
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal col-
lision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front and second
outboard seats)
1
2
Seat belt pretensioners (front and second outboard seats)
34
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This
feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt
again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (→P. 62)
■ When the third center seat belt cannot be extended
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 57)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt, follow the instructions on P. 30 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for
the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
Put your fingers between the seat belt
and the holder.
Pull the seat belt forcefully in the direction
of the arrow and then release it to unlock.
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt extender
is available from your Toyota dealer free
of charge.
35
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 30)
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P. 30)
Women who are pregnant should posi-
tion the lap belt as low as possible over
the hips in the same manner as other
occupants, extending the shoulder belt
completely over the shoulder and avoid-
ing belt contact with the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or a collision.
36
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ When the children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 33)
■ When using the third center seat belt
Do not use the third center seat belt with
either buckle released. Fastening only
one of the buckles may result in death or
serious injury in case of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or a collision.
37
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belt cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.
NOTICE
■ Using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
38
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
SRS airbags
◆ SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce
the risk of death or serious injury.
1
2
39
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the second outboard
seats
SRS curtain shield airbags
● Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the out-
board seats
● Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the
vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover
3
4
5
40
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
SRS airbag system components
Knee airbags
Curtain shield airbags
Front passenger airbag
Side impact sensors (front
door)
Front side airbags
SRS warning light
Side impact sensors (rear)
Rear side airbags (second out-
board seat)
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
Safing sensor (rear)
Airbag sensor assembly
Front impact sensors
Seat belt pretensioners (sec-
ond outboard seats)
Driver’s seat position sensor
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters (front seats)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
41
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag
sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on infor-
mation obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system compo-
nents diagram above. This information includes crash severity and
occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in
the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain
the motion of the occupants.
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from
the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10
in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the ped-
als comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat
somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the
road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.
42
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P. 57)
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the front seat belt buckles but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the seat
belt, the SRS front airbags will judge
that the driver and front passenger are
wearing the seat belt even though the
seat belt has not been connected. In
this case, the SRS front airbags may
not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
43
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seats toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
● Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and knee airbags deploy.
44
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of
these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious
injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,
be sure to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front
airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as
a door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front or rear pillars, roof side rail
and assist grip.
45
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags,
due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the front seats, parts of the front, side and rear pillars and roof side
rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of
a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency
call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without
needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with
the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required.
If the occupants are unable to communicate, the argent automatically treats
the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency
services. (→P. 435)
WARNING
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats, seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows,
winches or roof luggage carrier
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD
players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
46
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the
set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 -
18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following
situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole,
which can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a
truck
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pre-
tensioners will activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front air-
bags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if
the seat is unoccupied.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding
to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle
colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle
orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
● The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of a severe
frontal collision.
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than
a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also
deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some
examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling
47
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown
in the illustration.
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front air-
bags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal
collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward
deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
48
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is
subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the
side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-
speed frontal collision.
The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a
low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compart-
ment
● Collision from the side at an angle
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end
49
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
■ When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.
● A portion of a door or its surrounding
area is damaged or deformed, or the
vehicle was involved in an accident that
was not severe enough to cause the
SRS side and curtain shield airbags to
inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger air-
bag or lower portion of the instrument
panel is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked or other-
wise damaged.
● The portion of the front, side and rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked or otherwise
damaged.
50
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Front passenger occupant classification
system
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classi-
fication system. This system detects the conditions of the front
passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the
front passenger.
1
2
3
4
51
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
■ Adult*
1
■ Child*
4
or child restraint system with infant*
5
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classi-
fication system
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Off*
2
or
flashing
*
3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
*
6
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Off*
2
or
flashing
*
3
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
52
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■
Unoccupied
■ There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Not illuminated
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
53
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
*
1
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*
2
: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*
3
: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*
4
: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the
front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult
depending on his/her physique or posture.
*
5
: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on
the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P. 57)
*
6
: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how
to install the child restraint system properly. (→P. 62)
54
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat
belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate, which
could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pocket).
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
55
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches the rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not acti-
vate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear
seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear
seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the
vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or
if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat in the proper order. (→P. 62)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your
Toyota dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the second seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that cov-
ers the seat cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
56
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Safety information for children
● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid acci-
dental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to
avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the
power window accidentally. (→P. 109, 157)
● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or
pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, back door,
seats etc.
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehi-
cle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the
child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
57
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Child restraint systems
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appro-
priate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(→P. 62)
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be
properly restrained on the seat with the LATCH anchors or the
lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require
the use of child restraint systems.
Points to remember
59
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
■ When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat
When you have to use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat,
adjust the following:
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat
and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 30)
● The seatback to the most upright posi-
tion
● The seat cushion to the fully rearward
and highest position
● The seat belt height to the lowest posi-
tion
60
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-fac-
ing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas-
senger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front, side and rear pillars or roof
side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is danger-
ous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the
impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
61
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the pas-
senger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident.
62
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Installing child restraints
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for
the second outboard seat. (Buttons
displaying the location of the
anchors are attached to the seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s
seat belt) (→P. 34)
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided for
all second seats.
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions.
Firmly secure the child restraints using the LATCH anchors or a
seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child
restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system
is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children) system.
63
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Fold the seatback forward and
then adjust it as upright as pos-
sible.
Take off the covers between the
seat cushion and seatback,
then confirm the position of the
LATCH anchors below the sym-
bol in the seatback.
Type A
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH
anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
Installation with LATCH system
1
2
3
4
64
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
■ Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
Fold the seatback while pull-
ing the seatback angle lever.
Return the seatback and
secure it at the first lock posi-
tion. (→P. 135)
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the second seat or
the third outboard seat facing
the rear of the vehicle.
3
4
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock
function belt)
1
2
65
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and then allow it to retract
slightly in order to activate
the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt
to retract only.
While pushing the child
restraint system down into
the seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child
restraint system is securely
in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there
is no slack in the belt, pull the
belt to check that it cannot be
extended.
■
Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat
Fold the seatback while pull-
ing the seatback angle lever.
Return the seatback and
secure it at the first lock posi-
tion. (→P. 135)
3
4
5
1
66
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the second or third
seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder
strap and then allow it to
retract slightly into the ALR
lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt
to retract only.
While pushing the child
restraint system into the seat,
allow the shoulder belt to
retract until the child restraint
system is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there
is no slack in the belt, pull the
belt to check that it cannot be
extended.
If the child restraint system has a top tether strap, the top tether
strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.
(→P. 68)
2
3
4
5
6
67
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
■ Booster seat
Fold the seatback while pull-
ing the seatback angle lever.
Return the seatback and
secure it at the first lock posi-
tion. (→P. 135)
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
Sit the child in the child
restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint sys-
tem according to the manu-
facturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (→P. 30)
1
2
3
68
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Press the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Second outboard seats
Secure the child restraint sys-
tem using a seat belt or LATCH
anchors, and move the head
restraint in place at the upmost
position.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top
tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
Adjust the head restraint to the
downmost position.
Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
1
2
3
69
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Second center seat
Secure the child restraint sys-
tem using a seat belt and
remove the head restraint.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top
tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
Install the head restraint.
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
1
2
3
70
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the
shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause
injury or discomfort to the child. (→P. 34)
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● When installing a child restraint system on the second center seat, adjust
both seat cushions to the same position and align both seatbacks at the
same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely
restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint system, move the seat
as far back as possible, with the seatback close to the child restraint sys-
tem.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach the
child restraint system to the right-hand
rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
● Child restraint system installed on the
third seat should not contact the second
seatbacks.
● Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoid-
able. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat, move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious
injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
71
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
● When securing some types of child restraint systems in second or third
row seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions
next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt
effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and
low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint,
move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached,
or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in
the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
72
1-1. For safe use
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust
gases if inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to
an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the back door closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the back door is
closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a
garage, stop the engine.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be
sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
73
1-2. Theft deterrent system
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Engine immobilizer system
The indicator light flashes after
the engine switch has been turned
off to indicate that the system is
operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the engine switch has been
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode to indicate that
the system has been canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent
the engine from starting if a key has not been previously regis-
tered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehi-
cle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not
guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
74
1-2. Theft deterrent system
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
WARNING
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
75
1-2. Theft deterrent system
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Alarm
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
● A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using
the entry function or wireless remote control. (The doors will lock
again automatically.)
● The hood is opened.
● The battery is reconnected.
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors using the entry
function or wireless remote con-
trol. The system will be set auto-
matically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the sys-
tem is set.
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
● Unlock the doors using the entry function or wireless remote con-
trol.
● Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or
start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
The alarm
Setting the alarm system
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
76
1-2. Theft deterrent system
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of
the following.
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● The doors are unlocked using the
mechanical key.
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door
or hood, or unlocks the vehicle using an
inside lock button.
● The battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked. (→P. 551)
77
1-2. Theft deterrent system
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
1
For safety and security
■ Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically
lock to prevent improper entry into the vehicle:
● When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is
activated.
● While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the
door.
● When recharging or replacing the battery.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
80
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the tar-
get region.
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and
center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s vari-
ous systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration display
all warning lights and indicators illuminated.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
81
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s
systems.
*
1
: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off
after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a mal-
function in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*
2
: The light flashes or illuminates to indicate a malfunction.
*
3
: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*
4
: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
Warning lights
*
1
Brake system warning
light (→P. 518)
Open door warning light
(→P. 520)
*
1
Charging system
warning light (→P. 518)
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light (→P. 520)
*
1
Malfunction indicator
lamp (→P. 518)
*
3
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
(→P. 520)
*
1
SRS warning light
(→P. 518)
Low fuel level warning
light (→P. 520)
*
1
ABS warning light
(→P. 519)
*
1
Master warning light
(→P. 520)
*
1
Slip indicator (→P. 519)
*
1
Tire pressure warning
light (→P. 520)
*
1, 2
(if equipped)
PCS warning light
(→P. 519)
*
1, 4
Automatic headlight
leveling system warning
light (→P. 520)
82
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s
various systems.
Indicators
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 213)
Power mode indicator
(→P. 206)
Headlight high beam
indicator (→P. 214)
Second start mode
indicator (→P. 206)
Headlight indicator
(→P. 213)
Low speed four-wheel
drive indicator light
(→P. 286)
Automatic High Beam
indicator (→P. 217)
Center differential lock
indicator (→P. 286)
Fog light indicator
(→P. 222)
*
1, 4
“AIR BAG ON/
OFF” indicator
(→P. 50)
Cruise control indicator
(→P. 263, 275)
(if equipped)
Dynamic radar cruise
control indicator
(→P. 263)
*
1, 2
Slip indicator (→P. 364)
Turn Assist indicator
(→P. 290)
*
1, 3
TRAC OFF indicator
(→P. 365)
*
1
Crawl Control indicator
(→P. 290)
*
1, 3
VSC OFF indicator
(→P. 365)
(if equipped)
LDA indicator (→P. 254)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
83
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
*
1
: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn
off after the engine is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a mal-
function in a system if the lights do not turn on, or turn off. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*
2
: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*
3
: The light turns on when the system is turned off.
*
4
: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*
5
: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators
illuminate in the following situations:
• When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode while the sys-
tem is set to on.
• When the system is set to on while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror
indicators will turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not
turn off, there may be a malfunction with the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*
6
: This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
Cruise control “SET”
indicator (→P. 263, 275)
*
1
(if equipped)
BSM (Blind Spot
Monitor) indicator
(→P. 349)
Multi-terrain Select
indicator (→P. 295)
(if equipped)
RCTA (Rear Cross
Traffic Alert) indicator
(→P. 357)
*
1
Eco Driving Indicator
Light (→P. 84)
*
5, 6
(if equipped)
BSM (Blind Spot
Monitor) outside rear
view mirror indicators
(→P. 349)
*
1, 3
(if equipped)
PCS warning light
(→P. 241)
Shift position and shift
range indicators
(→P. 205)
Parking brake indicator
(→P. 212)
84
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
■ Eco Driving Indicator Light
● The shift lever is in any position other than D.
● The vehicle is set to second start mode or power mode. (→P. 205)
● The vehicle speed is approximately 81 mph (130 km/h) or higher.
● The Crawl Control is operating. (→P. 290)
During Eco-Friendly acceleration opera-
tion (Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator
Light will turn on. When the acceleration
exceeds Zone of Eco driving (→P. 96), or
when the vehicle is stopped, the light
turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Light will not operate
in the following conditions:
WARNING
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the Multi Terrain ABS and the SRS
warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that
these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which
could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.
85
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the tar-
get region.
Engine oil pressure gauge
Displays the engine oil pressure
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Voltmeter
Displays the charge state
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (→P. 89)
Odometer and trip meter display
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different dis-
tances independently.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
86
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
Shift position and shift range display
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (→P. 205)
Odometer/trip meter display change button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays
Instrument panel light control dial
The brightness of the instrument panel light can be adjusted
Pressing this button switches between odometer and trip meter.
Odometer
Trip meter A
*
Trip meter B*
*
: Pushing and holding the button will
reset the trip meter.
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
Changing the display
9
10
11
1
2
3
Instrument panel light control
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
87
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■ The meters and display illuminate when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ The brightness of the instrument panel lights
When the tail lights are turned on, the meter’s brightness will be reduced
slightly unless the meter brightness level adjustment is set to the brightest
setting.
If the tail lights are turned on when the surroundings are dark, the meter’s
brightness will reduce slightly. However, when the surroundings are bright,
such as during the daytime, the meter’s brightness will not be reduced even if
the tail lights are turned on.
■ Customization
The meter display can be customized on the multi-information display.
(Customizable features: →P. 582)
WARNING
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear
number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to down-
shift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an
accident resulting in death or injury.
88
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 554)
■ Voltmeter
When the voltmeter indicates 19 V or higher or 9 V or lower while the engine
is running, there may be a battery or charging system malfunction. Have the
vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer.
■ Engine oil pressure gauge
When the value of the engine oil pressure gauge drops while the engine is
running, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and check the amount
of engine oil. (→P. 460)
When the oil pressure drops even though the engine oil amount has not
decreased, or if the oil pressure does not increase when engine oil is
added, contact your Toyota dealer, as there may be a problem with the lubri-
cation system.
89
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The following information will be
displayed when a menu icon is
selected. (→P. 91)
Some of the information may be
displayed automatically depend-
ing on the situation.
Drive information
Select to display various drive data. (→P. 92)
Vehicle information display (if equipped)
Select to display the vehicle information. (→P. 94)
Navigation system-linked display
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
• Route guidance
• Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)
Audio system-linked display
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the display
using the meter control switches.
Driving assist system information (if equipped)
Select to display the operational status of the following systems:
• Dynamic radar cruise control (→P. 263)
When the vehicle is in constant speed control mode (→P. 271), the
menu icon will change to .
• LDA (Lane Departure Alert) (→P. 254)
Display contents
90
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
Warning message display
Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a
malfunction is detected. (→P. 527)
• When there are no current warning messages, “No Messages” is
displayed.
• When there are multiple warning messages, can be used to
switch the displayed warning message.
Settings display
Select to change the meter display settings and the operation set-
tings of some vehicle functions. (→P. 94)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
91
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
The multi-information display is operated using the meter control
switches.
Switching displayed items
Operate up and down:
Switches screens and moves
the cursor
Press:
Enters, moves to next screen
*,
and turns functions on/off
*
*
: For some functions
Press: Displays the screen registered as the top screen
When no screen has been registered, the drive information screen will be
displayed.
Press and hold: Registers the currently displayed screen as the top
screen
When the confirmation screen is displayed, select yes to register the
screen. If the selected screen cannot be registered, a registration failure
message will be shown.
Return to the previous screen
Operating the meter control switches
1
2
3
4
92
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
Items displayed can be switched by operating up and down.
■ Drive information
4 of the following items can be registered and displayed as the
drive information 1 and the drive information 2 (2 items on each
screen).
Refer to P. 94 for the registration method of the drive information 1
and the drive information 2.
●
Current fuel consumption (bar type/value type)
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
● Average fuel consumption (after reset*
2
/after start/after refuel)*
1
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset, the
engine was started, and the vehicle was refueled, respectively.
● Average vehicle speed (after reset*
2
/after start)
Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset and the
engine was started, respectively.
● Elapsed time (after reset*
2
/after start)
Displays the elapsed time since the function was reset and the engine
was started, respectively
● Distance (driving range/after start)
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the
quantity of fuel remaining and the distance driven after the engine was
started respectively.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display
may not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled
without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.
*
1
: Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
*
2
: The function can be reset by pressing for longer than 1 second
when the item to reset is displayed. If there is more than one item that can
be reset, the item selection screen will appear.
Drive information
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
93
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■ Eco Indicator (Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display)
→P. 96
■ Speed
Displays the vehicle speed.
■ Sway warning (if equipped)
Detects the sway of the vehicle within a lane, which is often associ-
ated with a decrease in the driver’s attention level, and displays the
decrease in attention using a bar display.
The shorter the bar length, the more the driver may need to rest.
This display is a part of the LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system. The dis-
play is enabled when the operating conditions of the vehicle sway warn-
ing function are met. (→P. 254)
■
Blank screen (display off)
Drive information is not displayed.
94
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
Items displayed can be switched by operating up and down.
■ Front tire angle (if equipped)
Displays the direction of the front tires.
The tire direction is displayed in 3 stages for both left and right, in
accordance with the angle of the tire.
If a battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected, the display may
be disabled temporarily. After driving the vehicle for a while, the display
will be enabled.
■
Tire inflation pressure
Displays inflation pressure of each tire
The inflation pressure of the spare tire will be displayed.
■ Oil maintenance
Displays the remaining distance before the next maintenance is
required.
The settings of some features can be changed by using the meter
control switches.
■ Setting procedure
On the setting screen, choose the desired item using , and
then press .
• For functions that can be enabled or disabled, the function switches
between on and off each time is pressed.
• For functions that allow to select operation contents, display con-
tents, etc., the setting screen is displayed.
Select the desired setting by operating , and then press
.
To stop the selection, press to return to the previous screen.
Vehicle information
Settings display
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
95
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■ Setting items
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
*
Select to set up LDA. (→P. 582)
• Alert sensitivity
• Sway warning
• Sway sensitivity
● BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
*
Select to activate/deactivate BSM. (→P. 582)
• BSM on/off
• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) on/off
● Scheduled maintenance
Select to reset the message indicating maintenance is required.
● Oil maintenance
Select to reset the engine oil maintenance information
● Meter settings
Select to set the following items.
• Language
Select to change the language on the display.
•Units
Select to change the unit for measure.
• Eco Driving Indicator Light
Select to activate/deactivate the Eco Driving Indicator Light.
(
→P. 84)
• switch settings
You can register 1 screen as the top screen. To register, press
and hold while the desired screen is displayed.
• Drive information 1 and 2
Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on a drive
information screen, up to 2 drive information screens can be
set.
• Pop-up display
Select to set the pop-up displays (→P. 96), which may appear
in some situations, on/off.
96
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
• Accent color
Select to change the accent colors on the screen, such as the
cursor color.
• Initialization
Select to reset the meter display settings.
*: If equipped
■ Eco Driving Indicator
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The drive information will be reset (only items that can be reset manually).
■ Pop-Up display
The pop-up display is displayed on the multi-information display according to
the operating conditions of the following functions:
● Route guidance display of the navigation system-linked system
● Incoming call display of the hands-free phone system (if equipped)
The pop-up display function can be disabled.
Eco Driving Indicator Light (→P. 84)
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Suggests the Zone of Eco driving with
current Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration.
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco
driving, the right side of Eco Driving
Indicator Zone Display will illuminate.
Zone of Eco driving
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
97
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the
engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may also take a few
minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has
been adjusted.
● “---” may be displayed if the tire information cannot be determined due to
unfavorable radio wave conditions.
● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values
may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure
gauge.
■ When setting up the display
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift
lever to P
■ Suspension of the settings display
In the following situations, the settings display using the meter control
switches will be suspended.
● When a warning message appears on the multi-information display
● When the vehicle begins to move
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to
use the display.
WARNING
■ Caution for use while driving
For safety, avoid operating the meter control switch while driving as much
as possible, and do not look continuously at the multi-information display
while driving. Stop the vehicle and operate the meter control switch. Failure
to do so may cause a steering wheel operation error, resulting in an unex-
pected accident.
■ Cautions while setting up the display
As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that
the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area
such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO)
may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
NOTICE
■ While setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting
up the display features.
98
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
Fuel consumption information
Press the “INFO/APPS” button, and then select “Fuel Consumption”
on the screen.
Reset the trip information data
Previous fuel consumption per
minute
Current fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed
Elapsed time
Cruising range
Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color
into past averages and averages attained since the engine switch was
last turned to IGNITION ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference.
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual
conditions.
The fuel consumption information can be displayed on the navi-
gation system or multimedia system screen.
Display the trip information or past record screen
Trip information
1
2
3
4
5
6
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
99
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
Reset the past record data
Best recorded fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Previous fuel consumption
record
Update the past record data
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual
conditions.
■ Resetting the data
Selecting “Clear” on the “Trip information” screen will reset the trip informa-
tion data.
Selecting “Clear” on the “Past record” screen will reset the past record data.
■ Updating the past record data
Selecting “Update” on the “Past record” screen will update the past record
data.
Also, the average fuel consumption displayed in the multi-information display
will be reset at the same time.
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quan-
tity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a
result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
Past record
1
2
3
4
5
101
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3
Operation of
each component
3-1. Key information
Keys.................................. 102
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Side doors......................... 106
Back door.......................... 114
Smart key system ............. 126
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats........................ 133
Rear seats......................... 135
Driving position memory ... 142
Head restraints.................. 146
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel.................. 149
Inside rear view mirror ...... 151
Outside rear view
mirrors............................. 153
3-5. Opening, closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows................. 157
Moon roof.......................... 161
102
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key system
(→P. 126)
• Operating the wireless remote
control function
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Locks the doors (→P. 106)
Unlocks the doors (→P. 106)
Opens the windows and moon
roof
*
1
(→P. 106)
Opens/closes the power back
door*
2
(→P. 114)
Sounds the alarm (→P. 103)
*
1
: This setting must be customized at
your Toyota dealer.
*
2
: If equipped
The keys
1
2
3
Wireless remote control
1
2
3
4
5
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
103
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
To take out the mechanical key,
slide the release lever and take
the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the
key only has grooves on one side.
If the key cannot be inserted in a
lock cylinder, turn it over and re-
attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the
mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key bat-
tery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will
need the mechanical key. (→P. 548)
■ Panic mode
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (→P. 403)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with
the electronic key only.
■ If you lose your mechanical keys
New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using
another mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number
plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
Using the mechanical key
When is pressed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound
intermittently and the vehicle lights will
flash to deter any person from trying to
break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
electronic key.
104
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-1. Key information
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press
any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are
carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not
likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic
key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine
stops.
● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become
depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indi-
cate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery
when necessary. (→P. 487)
• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1
m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers
■ Replacing the key battery
→P. 487
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
105
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer, etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as
TVs, audio systems and induction cookers.
● Do not place the keys near medical electrical equipment such as low-fre-
quency therapy equipment or microwave therapy equipment, and do not
receive medical attention with the keys on your person.
■ Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appli-
ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances
within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, caus-
ing the key to not function properly.
■ In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related prob-
lems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to
your Toyota dealer.
■ When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases signifi-
cantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic
keys that were provided with your vehicle.
106
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Side doors
◆ Smart key system
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
Grip the driver’s door handle
to unlock the door. Grip the
passenger’s door handle to
unlock all the doors.
*
Make sure to touch the sensor
on the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked
for 3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be changed. (→P. 112)
Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part or lower
part of the handle) to lock the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.
◆ Wireless remote control
Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the but-
ton again unlocks the other
doors.
Press and hold to open the win-
dows and moon roof.
*
*
: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry func-
tion, wireless remote control or door lock switch.
Locking and unlocking the doors from the outside
1
2
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
107
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the
doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and
moon roof are operating.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of
the door handle
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
■ Setting the alarm
Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (→P. 75)
■ If the smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate
properly
Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (→P. 548)
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. (→P. 487)
If the door will not lock even when the top-
side sensor area is touched, try touching
both the topside and underside sensor
areas at the same time.
108
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
◆ Door lock switches
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
◆ Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside
1
2
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
109
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be
detected correctly and the door may be locked.
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is
set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear doors.
Locking the driver’s door from the outside without a key
Rear door child-protector lock
1
2
1
2
110
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
The following functions can be set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 582.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
Function Operation
Shift position linked door
locking function
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all the
doors.
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all the
doors.
Speed linked door locking
function
All the doors are locked when the vehicle
speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or
higher.
Driver’s door linked door
unlocking function
All the doors are unlocked when the driver’s
door is opened within approximately 45 sec-
onds after turning the engine switch off.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
111
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■ Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure
below:
Close all the doors and turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON
mode. (Perform step within 20 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N,
and press and hold the door
lock switch ( or ) for
approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch posi-
tions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown in the following table.
Use the same procedure to cancel the function.
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all the doors
are locked and then unlocked.
1
2
2
Function Shift lever position
Door lock switch
position
Shift position linked door locking
function
P
Shift position linked door unlock-
ing function
Speed linked door locking func-
tion
N
Driver’s door linked door unlocking
function
112
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Changing the door unlock function setting
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless
remote control.
Turn the engine switch off.
When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold
or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding .
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.
(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least
5 seconds, and repeat step .)
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the
wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings
have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is
pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be
set.)
In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P. 75)
1
2
2
Multi-information
display
Unlocking function Beep
Holding the driver’s door
handle unlocks only the
driver’s door.
Exterior: Beeps 3
times
Interior: Pings once
Holding a passenger’s door
handle unlocks all the
doors.
Holding a door handle
unlocks all the doors.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
113
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■ Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are
unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, how-
ever, the system may not operate.
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.
(→P. 548)
■ Conditions affecting the operation of the smart key system or wireless
remote control
→P. 128
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 582)
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant being thrown
out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seats.
114
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Back door
◆ Smart key system
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
Unlocks all the doors
The doors cannot be unlocked
for 3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
◆ Wireless remote control
→P. 106
◆ Door lock switches
→P. 108
Press and hold the switch.
The power back door can be oper-
ated even when the back door is
locked.
*
*
: This setting can be customized so
that the power back door can be
operated only when the back door
is unlocked. (→P. 582)
The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the fol-
lowing procedures.
Locking and unlocking the back door
1
2
Opening/closing the back door with the wireless remote control
(vehicles with power back door)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
115
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
The power back door can be
opened/closed using the power
back door switch or wireless
remote control. (→P. 114)
Push and hold the switch to close
or open.
(A buzzer sounds.)
Open the upper back door
Vehicles without power back
door
When the back door is
unlocked: Raise the back
door while pressing up the
back door opener switch.
When the back door is
locked: While carrying an
electronic key, raise the back
door while pressing up the
back door opener switch.
Vehicles with power back door
When the power back door is unlocked: Press the back door
opener switch.
When the power back door is locked: While carrying an elec-
tronic key, press and hold the back door opener switch.
The upper back door will automatically* open.
*: Using the customization function, the upper back door can be set to
not automatically open, even when the back door opener switch is
pressed. (→P. 582)
When the automatic open function is disabled, the upper back door
can be opened by lifting it up with the back door opener switch
pressed and held.
Opening the back door from the inside (vehicles with power
back door)
Opening the back door from the outside
1
116
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Open the lower back door
Pull the handle.
Pressing the switch closes upper
back door automatically. (A
buzzer sounds.)
Pressing the switch while the
upper back door is closing opens it
again.
Turn the main switch off to disable
the power back door system.
On
Orange mark on the switch should
be visible when the switch is on.
Off
The back door cannot be operated
even with the wireless remote con-
trol or power back door switch.
2
Power back door switch (if equipped)
Canceling the power back door system (if equipped)
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
117
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
● Make sure that the lower side of
the back door is closed before
closing the upper side of the
back door.
● Lower the back door using the
back door handle, and make
sure to push the back door
down from the outside to close
it.
The rear step bumper is for rear
end protection and easier step-up
loading.
When closing the back door
Rear step bumper
118
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Power back door operating conditions (vehicles with power back door)
● When the engine switch is off or in accessory mode, the power back door
can be opened and closed if the power back door main switch is on and all
of the following conditions are met.
• The lower back door is closed (only when closing)
*
1
● When the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the power back door can
be opened and closed if the power back door main switch is on and all of the
following conditions are met.
*
2
• The power back door is unlocked (except when closing)
• The lower back door is closed (only when closing)
*
1
• The vehicle speed is below 1 mph (3 km/h) and the shift lever is in P
*
1
: If the lower back door is opened while the upper back door is in a closing
operation, it automatically opens again.
*
2
: The back door cannot be operated using the wireless remote control.
■ If the back door opener is inoperative
The back door can be operated from the inside.
Remove the cover on the back door
trim.
Use a cloth to prevent scratches.
Remove the screw and cover.
(Vehicle without power back door)
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
119
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
Push the lever for the back door motor, open the back door.
Vehicles without power back door
Vehicles with power back door
■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door)
If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, the back
door will automatically operate in the opposite direction.
■ When re-connecting the battery (vehicles with power back door)
To enable the power back door to operate properly, perform the following:
● Unlock the back door using the door lock switch
● Close the back door manually
■ Back door closer (vehicles with power back door)
In the event that the upper side and lower side of the back door are left
slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close them to the fully
closed position.
■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power back door)
While the power back door is opening automatically, applying excessive force
to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door from rap-
idly falling down.
3
IY32LA068
120
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Back door reserve lock function (vehicles with power back door)
This function is a function which reserves locking of all doors, beforehand,
when the back door is open. When the following procedure is performed, all
the doors except the back door are locked and then back door will also be
locked at the same time it is closed.
Close all doors, except the back door.
Perform any of the following during the automatic closing operation of the
back door.
• Press the lock button on the wireless remote control. (→P. 102)
• Touch the lock sensor on the side door handle with carrying the electronic
key on your person. (→P. 106)
Also, if the back door does not fully close due to the operation of the jam
protection function, etc., while the back door is automatically closing after a
reserve lock operation is performed, the reserve lock function is canceled
and all the doors will unlock.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. switch operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 582)
WARNING
■ While driving
● Keep the back door closed while driving.
If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-
gage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If
the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving,
causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or a collision, they are susceptible to death or
serious injury.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could
have heat exhaustion or other injuries.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
121
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
WARNING
■ Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death
or serious injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door
before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door suddenly shut
again after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure
the surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the back door is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
● The back door may suddenly shut if it is
not opened fully. It is more difficult to
open or close the back door on an
incline than on a level surface, so
beware of the back door unexpectedly
opening or closing by itself. Make sure
that the back door is fully open and
secure before using the luggage com-
partment.
122
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
WARNING
● Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do
not hang on the back door damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to
break, causing an accident.
● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it
may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands,
head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part
to the back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recommended.
● When closing the back door, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught. Also pay attention to your
personal belongings such as bags and
ties.
● When closing the back door, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface. If
the back door handle is used to fully
close the back door, it may result in
hands or arms being caught.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
123
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
WARNING
■ Back door closer (vehicles with power back door)
● Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the
power back door system is cancelled.
■ Power back door (if equipped)
Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obsta-
cles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the back door is about to open or close.
● If the power back door system is turned off with the main switch while the
back door is operating automatically, the automatic operation is stopped.
The back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on
an incline, as the back door may open or close unexpectedly.
● When the back door opener switch is pressed a second time during an
automatic open operation that was performed by pressing the back door
opener switch, the operation stops and the back door has to be operated
manually. At this time, take extra care, as the back door may open or close
abruptly.
● If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a
buzzer may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The
back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an
incline, as the back door may open or close abruptly.
● On an incline, the back door may suddenly shut after it opens. Make sure
the back door is fully open and secure.
● In the event that the back door is left
slightly open, the back door closer will
automatically close it to the fully closed
position. It takes several seconds
before the back door closer begins to
operate. Be careful not to catch fingers
or anything else in the back door, as this
may cause bone fractures or other seri-
ous injuries.
124
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
WARNING
● In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality
and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has
to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back
door may open or close abruptly.
• When the back door contacts an obstacle
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the engine
switch is turned to the IGNITION ON mode or the engine is started
during automatic operation
● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, the
power back door may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the
back door may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing some-
one’s hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an
accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recom-
mended.
■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door)
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or any-
thing else.
● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the
object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
125
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
NOTICE
■ Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in
place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting
in malfunction.
● Do not place your hand on the damper stay or apply lateral forces to it.
■ To prevent back door closer malfunction (vehicles with power back
door)
Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is
operating.
■ To prevent damage to the power back door (if equipped)
● Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that
would prevent movement of the back door. Operating the power back door
when excessive load is present on the back door may cause a malfunc-
tion.
● Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door
is operating.
● Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges
of the power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is
disconnected, the power back door will not operate in automatic operation.
■ When operating the back door reserve lock function (vehicles with
power back door)
Make sure to carry the electronic key on your person.
If the electronic key is returned inside the vehicle during the closing opera-
tion, it may be locked even if the electronic key is inside the vehicle depend-
ing on the location of electronic key.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that all the doors are closed and
locked.
● Do not attach any foreign objects, such
as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives
to the damper stay rod.
● Do not touch the damper stay rod with
gloves or other fabric items.
● Do not attach any accessories other
than genuine Toyota parts to the back
door.
Damper stay
126
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Smart key system
● Locks and unlocks the side doors (→P. 106)
● Locks and unlocks the back door (→P. 114)
● Starts the engine (→P. 199)
■ Antenna location
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying
the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
The driver should always carry the electronic key.
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna outside the luggage compart-
ment
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
127
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
■ Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages
shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle
and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate mea-
sures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display.
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when
only alarms are sounded.
When locking or unlocking the doors
The system can be operated when the
electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7
m) of either of the outside front door
handle. (Only the doors detecting the
key can be operated.)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 5
seconds
An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a door
is open
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again
Interior alarm pings
continuously
The engine switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s door
was open (or the driver’s
door was opened while the
engine switch was in
ACCESSORY mode)
Turn the engine switch
off and close the
driver’s door
The engine switch was
turned off while the driver’s
door was open
Close the driver’s door
128
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic
key battery and the battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in
operation for a long time.
● In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to
unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of
the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.
● If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors
cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case, take
hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the
mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping
the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the
communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected,
preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and engine immobi-
lizer system from operating properly.
(Ways of coping: →P. 548)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical
noise
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
Press twice while pressing and hold-
ing . Confirm that the electronic key
indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart key system cannot be used. To
cancel the function, press any of the elec-
tronic key buttons.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
129
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication device
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the
rear window
● When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic
devices
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas),
the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near
the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel or floor, or in the door pock-
ets or glove box when the engine is started or engine switch modes are
changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the
door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave recep-
tion conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the
doors will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic
key inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the elec-
tronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start
the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the
door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is
within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
● Touching the door lock or unlock sensor while wearing gloves may prevent
lock or unlock operation.
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic
key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be
unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock
the doors.)
● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition sig-
nals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition
signals will be given.
130
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effec-
tive range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the
following correction procedures to wash the vehicle.
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the
vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key sys-
tem. (→P. 128)
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information dis-
play and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock
all the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice,
snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or
use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle.
● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped or back door
unlock switch is pressed.
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the origi-
nal position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle
again.
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft.
(2 m) of the vehicle.
● The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (→P. 582)
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the
outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key
may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The
alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not
operate.)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
131
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
■ If the smart key system does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 548)
● Starting the engine: →P. 549
■ Customization
Settings (e. g. smart key system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 582)
■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P. 106, 548)
● Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes: →P. 549
● Stopping the engine: →P. 200
■ Certification for the smart key system
132
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
WARNING
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system antennas. (→P. 126)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves.
Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac
pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implant-
able cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details on disabling the entry function.
133
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
Front seats
Seat position control switch
Seatback angle control switch
Seat cushion (front) angle control switch
Vertical height control switch
Lumber support control switch (driver’s side only)
When the occupant’s lower back
presses against the seatback
during a rear-end collision, the
head restraint moves slightly for-
ward and upward to help reduce
the risk of whiplash on the seat
occupant.
Adjustment procedure
Active head restraints
1
2
3
4
5
134
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Active head restraints
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to
move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head
restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.
WARNING
■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an
accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
During
rear-end
collision
Inner structure
136
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
For easy access to the third seat, perform in “Tumbling the second
seats”. (→P. 137)
■ Before tumbling the second seats
Stow the seat belt buckles
and lower the head restraints
to the lowest position.
Pass the outer seat belts
through the seat belt hangers
and secure the seat belt
plates.
This prevents the shoulder belt
from being damage.
Make sure that the seat belts
are removed from the hangers
before using them.
Vehicles with rear seat enter-
tainment system: Pass the
cover belt under the display
and slide the cover up.
Slide the cover down from
the top of the display to cover
it.
Tumbling the second seats and third seat entry
1
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
137
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
■ Tumbling the second seats
Fold down the seatback
while pulling the seatback
angle adjustment lever, and
swing the whole seat up and
forward.
Hook the holding strap to the
assist grip and secure the
seat by pulling its free end.
When returning the second seat
to its original position, stow the
holding strap.
Remove the seat hook cov-
ers from the back of the seat
cushion, and install them on
the seat hooks.
When returning the second seat
to its original position, remove
the seat hook covers from the
floor and install them in the back
of the seat cushion.
1
2
3
138
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Before folding up the third seats
Stow the seat belts buckles.
Stow the center head restraint in the seatback. (→P. 148)
Pass the outer seat belts
through the seat belt hangers
and secure the seat belt
plates.
This prevents the shoulder belt
from being damage.
Make sure that the seat belts
are removed from the hangers
before using them.
Stow the center seat belt tabs in the cover set in the roof.
(→P. 31)
■ Folding up the third seats
Fold down the head
restraints while pulling the
head restraint angle lever.
Folding up the third seats
1
2
3
4
1
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
139
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
Push the seatback angle
levers and fold the third seat-
backs.
Pull the seat leg lock release
levers.
The seat will rise, and the seat-
back striker will also automati-
cally sit up.
Before raising, make sure that
the handle on the rear of the
seatback is
secure.
Secure the seats by the strik-
ers.
Remove the seat hook cov-
ers from the back of the seat
cushion, and install them on
the seat hooks.
2
3
4
5
140
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Returning the third seats
Remove the seat hook cov-
ers from the floor and install
them into the back of the seat
cushion.
Unlock the seats by pulling
the stowed seat lock release
levers and lower the seats to
its original position.
Secure the seats by the strik-
ers.
Pull the handle and raise the
seatbacks.
Fix the handle securely in its
original position after use.
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
141
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
Raise the head restraints.
5
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an
accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
■ When the seatback is folded
● Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback while driving.
● Be sure to install the seat hook covers on the seat hooks, or you may get
burned when they become hot.
■ When returning the seatbacks to their original position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.
● Make sure the seats are securely locked. Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.
● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat.
● Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.
■ Avoiding damage to seat components
Do not hang or attach anything on the seatback striker.
NOTICE
■ Before tumbling, folding up the seats
The seat belts and buckles must be stowed.
■ After returning the third seat
Make sure that the handle on the rear of the seatback has been secured.
142
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Driving position memory
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steer-
ing wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be recorded and recalled
by pressing a button.
Three different driving positions can be recorded into memory.
■ Recording procedure
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
While pressing the “SET”
button, or within 3 seconds
after the “SET” button is
pressed, press button “1”, “2”
or “3” until the buzzer
sounds.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previ-
ously recorded position will be
overwritten.
This feature automatically adjusts the driver’s seats, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors to make entering and exit-
ing the vehicle easier or to suit your preferences.
Driving position memory
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
143
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
■ Recall procedure
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Press one of the buttons for
the driving position you want
to recall until the buzzer
sounds.
■ To stop the position recall operation part-way through
Perform any of the following:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position
recall).
● Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering
wheel position recall).
■ Seat position that can be memorized (→P. 133)
The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumber support
switch can be recorded.
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the engine switch
off
Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s
door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.
■ In order to correctly use the driving position memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is
operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different
when it is recalled.
1
2
3
144
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Each electronic key can be registered to recall your preferred driving
position.
■ Registering procedure
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before perform-
ing the following:
Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver’s
door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be
recorded properly.
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Recall the driving position that you want to record.
While pressing the recalled
button, press and hold the
door lock switch (either lock
or unlock) until the buzzer
sounds.
If the button could not be regis-
tered, the buzzer sounds contin-
uously for approximately 3
seconds.
■
Recall procedure
Make sure that the doors are locked before recalling the driving
position. Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the
driving position, and then unlock and open the driver’s door using
the smart key system or wireless remote control.
The driving position will move to the recorded position.
If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the
seat and outside rear view mirrors will not move.
Memory recall function
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
145
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
■ Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver’s
door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be
canceled properly.
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
While pressing the “SET” button, press and hold the door lock
switch (either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice.
If the button could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for
approximately 3 seconds.
■ Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function
● Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. There-
fore, the driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the
key being carried.
● If a door other than the driver’s door is unlocked with the smart key system,
the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving posi-
tion button which has been set.
■ Customization
The unlock door settings of the memory recall function can be customized.
(Customizable features: →P. 582)
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear
passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
1
2
146
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Head restraints
Vertical adjustment
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pushing the lock release button.
Angle adjustment (if equipped)
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Press and hold the lock release
button when lowering the head
restraint.
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Lock release button
1
2
Second seats
Lock release button
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
147
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
To fold the head restraints, pull the
head restraint angle lever
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■ Removing the head restraints
Front seats
While pressing in the flathead screwdriver, pull up the head restraint.
Second seats
Third outboard seats
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
Push a flathead screwdriver into the
slot. The slot is located on the right side
of the right head restraint anchor.
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
1
2
Lock release button
148
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Third center seat
Third outboard seats
While pressing in the flathead screwdriver, pull up the head restraint.
■ Installing the head restraints
Align the head restraint with the installation holes.
Push down the head restraint to the lock position.
■ When not using the third center seat head restraint
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
Push a flathead screwdriver into the
slot.
The slot is located on the left side of the
left head restraint anchor.
Open the zipper on the back of the third
seat and stow the head restraint inside.
WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Lock release button
1
2
1
2
149
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Steering wheel
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following direc-
tions:
Up
Down
Toward the driver
Away from the driver
When the engine switch is off, the
steering wheel returns to its
stowed position by moving up and
away to enable easier driver entry
and exit.
Switching to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return the
steering wheel to the original posi-
tion.
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
Adjustment procedure
1
2
3
4
Auto tilt away
Horn
150
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode
*.
*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted
regardless of engine switch mode.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automati-
cally by the driving position memory system. (→P. 142)
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
151
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Inside rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving
posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles
behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare
function mode
ON/OFF
When the automatic anti-glare
function is in ON mode, the indica-
tor illuminates.
The function will be set to ON
mode each time the engine switch
is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the func-
tion to OFF mode. (The indicator
also turns off.)
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable suffi-
cient confirmation of the rear view in accordance with the
driver’s seating posture.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Anti-glare function
Indicator
152
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate prop-
erly, do not touch or cover them.
WARNING
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
153
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Outside rear view mirrors
To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.
Left
Right
To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
■ Using the switch
Extends the mirrors
Folds the mirrors
Adjustment procedure
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
Folding and extending the mirrors
1
2
154
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■
Setting automatic mode
The door mirrors can be automatically folded and extended by link-
ing them to the lock and unlock operations of the smart key system
and wireless remote control. They can also be extended by turning
the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Put the switch in the neutral
position
When the mirror select switch is in the L or R position, the outside rear
view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is
reversing in order to give a better view of the ground.
To disable this function, move the mirror select switch to the neutral
position (between L and R).
■ Adjusting the mirror angle when the vehicle is reversing
With the shift lever in R, adjust the mirror angle at a desired posi-
tion. The adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will auto-
matically tilt to the memorized angle whenever the shift lever is
shifted to R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the nor-
mal position (angle adjusted with the shift lever in other than R). There-
fore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position
will also change.
When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.
Linked mirror function when reversing
155
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn
on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defog-
gers. (→P. 386)
■ Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to auto mode, the outside
rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear
view mirror to reduce reflected light. (→P. 151)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the
touch of a button. (→P. 144)
■ Using automatic mode in cold weather
When automatic mode is used in cold weather, the door mirror could freeze
up and automatic stowing and return may not be possible. In this event,
remove any ice and snow from the door mirror, then either operate the mirror
using manual mode or move the mirror by hand.
156
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot
and burn you.
NOTICE
■ If ice should jam the mirror
Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to
free the mirror.
157
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing
One-touch closing
*
Opening
One-touch opening
*
*
: To stop the window partway, oper-
ate the switch in the opposite direc-
tion.
Press the switch down to lock the
passenger window switches.
The indicator will come on.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or clos-
ing a passenger window.
Opening and closing procedures
1
2
3
4
Window lock switch
158
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■ The power windows can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They
cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame
while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is
opened slightly.
■ Catch protection function
If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window
is opening, window movement is stopped.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
159
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
■ When the window cannot be opened or closed
When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates
unusually and the door window cannot be opened or closed, perform the fol-
lowing operations with the power window switch of that door.
● Stop the vehicle. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, within 4
seconds of the jam protection function or catch protection function activat-
ing, continuously operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing
direction or one-touch opening direction so that the door window can be
opened and closed.
● If the door window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the
above operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction
and completely close the door window.
Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the
switch in the one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approxi-
mately 6 seconds or more.
Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direc-
tion. After the door window is completely opened, continue holding the
switch for an additional 1 second or more.
Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the
switch in the one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approxi-
mately 4 seconds or more.
Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction
again. After the door window is completely closed, continue holding the
switch for a further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the
beginning.
If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
*
(→P. 548)
● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.
*
(→P. 106)
*: The settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.
■ Power windows open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display
in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s
door is opened with the power windows open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 582)
1
2
3
4
5
6
160
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the
operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation,
especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is
possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in
the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use
the window lock switch. (→P. 157)
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating
the power windows, operate the power window after checking to make
sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body
parts caught in the window. Also, do not let a child operate window by the
wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and
other passengers to get caught in the power window.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just
before the window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your
body jammed in the window.
■ Catch protection function
● Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the
catch protection function.
● The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your
body or clothing caught in the window.
161
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
Moon roof
Opens the moon roof*
The moon roof stops slightly before
the fully open position to reduce
wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully open
the moon roof.
Closes the moon roof*
*
: Lightly press either end of the
moon roof switch to stop the moon
roof partway.
Tilts the moon roof up*
Tilts the moon roof down*
*
: Lightly press either end of the
moon roof switch to stop the moon
roof partway.
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and
tilt it up and down.
Opening and closing
1
2
Tilting up and down
1
2
162
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, how-
ever, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon
roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens
slightly.
■ If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically
Keep the switch depressed.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
*
(→P. 548)
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.
*
(→P. 106)
*: The settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.
*
1
The moon roof will close, re-open and pause for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
*
2
Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 sec-
ond. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
163
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “UP” switch.
*
1
until the moon roof moves into the tilt
up position and stops.
Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch
again.
*
1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up posi-
tion.
*
2
Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.
Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
*
1
: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to
be performed again from the beginning.
*
2
: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the
“CLOSE” or “UP” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for
approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to
make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the
switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-
dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Moon roof open reminder function
The buzzer sounds and message is shown on the multi-information display in
the instrument panel when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s
door is opened with the moon roof open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 582)
1
2
3
4
164
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Opening the moon roof
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
● The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a
child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passen-
gers to have body parts caught in the moon roof.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod-
ies in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being
operated.
● When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating
the moon roof, operate the moon roof after checking to make sure that
there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts
caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let a child operate moon roof by the
wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and
other passengers to get caught in the moon roof.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
165
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4
Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle............. 166
Cargo and luggage ........... 175
Vehicle load limits ............. 181
Trailer towing..................... 182
Dinghy towing ................... 198
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch..... 199
Automatic transmission..... 205
Turn signal lever................ 211
Parking brake.................... 212
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch................ 213
Automatic High Beam ....... 217
Fog light switch ................. 222
Windshield wipers and
washer ............................ 223
Rear window wiper and
washer ............................ 227
Headlight cleaner
switch.............................. 229
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap.................................. 230
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Toyota Safety Sense P..... 234
PCS
(Pre-Collision System).... 241
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert).... 254
Dynamic radar cruise
control............................. 263
Cruise control.................... 275
Intuitive parking assist....... 278
Four-wheel drive system... 286
Crawl Control (with Turn
Assist function) ............... 290
Multi-terrain Select............ 295
Multi-terrain Monitor.......... 299
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor)........ 349
• BSM function ................ 353
• RCTA function .............. 357
Driving assist systems ...... 363
4-6. Driving tips
Off-road precautions......... 370
Winter driving tips ............. 375
166
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle
→P. 199
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P. 205)
Release the parking brake. (→P. 212)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelera-
tor pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift
lever to P or N. (→P. 205)
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake (→P. 212), and shift the shift lever to P
(→P. 205).
Press the engine switch to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe
driving:
Starting the engine
Driving
Stopping
Parking the vehicle
Starting off on a steep uphill
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
167
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
■ When starting off on an uphill
Hill-start assist control is activated. (→P. 363)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the win-
dows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be espe-
cially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road sur-
face, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to
meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
● When the brake pedal is depressed
■ Restraining engine output (Brake Override System)
● When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the
engine output may be restrained.
● A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the
system is operating. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information
display, read the message and follow the instructions.
■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recom-
mended:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
● For the first 600 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
168
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodi-
cally or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced.
Have your Toyota dealer, perform the bedding-down operation.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (→P. 568)
■ When turning off the engine
Emission system operating sounds may continue for a short time after the
engine is turned off. This is not a malfunction, and helps to ensure optimal
performance of the emission system.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
169
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelera-
tor pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P. 509
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (→P. 205)
● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
170
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving
position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving
backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.
● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected
rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
171
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate
suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the
parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed
while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat,
which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s
electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehi-
cle.
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
172
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not
set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.
● If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator
turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer
mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this
time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in
P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the
shifting of the transfer mode. (→P. 286)
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this
case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
173
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or
the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline com-
ponents or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain the engine output.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if
the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehi-
cle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire. (→P. 532)
174
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
NOTICE
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-
mission, transfer, differentials, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
175
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Cargo and luggage
Roof rails
Cross rails
Turn the knobs counterclock-
wise to release the cross rails.
Slide the cross rails to the
appropriate position for loading
luggage and turn the knobs
clockwise to tighten the cross
rails securely.
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load:
Roof luggage carrier (if equipped)
1
2
Adjusting the position of cross rails (if equipped)
1
2
176
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) − (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ⎯
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 × 150) =
650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle. (→P. 181)
Capacity and distribution
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
177
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (→P. 560)
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in
your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight)
of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity
will be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B
*
2
lb. (kg) − A*
1
lb. (kg) = C*
3
lb. (kg)
*
1
:A = Weight of people
*
2
:B = Total load capacity
*
3
:C = Available cargo and luggage load
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D
lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E
lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg) − D*
4
lb. (kg) = E*
5
lb. (kg)
*
4
:D = Additional weight of people
*
5
:E = Available cargo and luggage load
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
Calculation formula for your vehicle
1
2
178
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compart-
ment:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly,
may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or
passengers, possibly causing an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possi-
ble.
● Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher
than the seatbacks.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
• On auxiliary box or tray that has no lid
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
● When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed
directly behind the front seats.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not
designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat
belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer
death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
179
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
WARNING
■ Load and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper
loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.
■ Roof luggage carrier precautions (if equipped)
To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails
with two or more genuine Toyota cross rails or their equivalent.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions when installing
the cross rails or their equivalent.
When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:
● Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the
front and rear axles.
● If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length
or width. (→P. 560)
● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof
luggage carrier.
● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of grav-
ity of the vehicle higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of
control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly
and result in death or serious injury.
● If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop
the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo
remains in its place.
● Do not exceed 154 lb. (70 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.
■ Cross rail adjustment
Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by pushing forward and
rearward them.
Failure to do so may cause an accident or serious injury in the event of
emergency braking or a collision.
181
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Vehicle load limits
◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P. 560
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
◆ Seating capacity: 8 occupants (Front 2, Rear 6)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
◆ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating): →P. 186, 560
TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.
◆ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(→P. 480)
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.
WARNING
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering
and braking ability, resulting in an accident.
182
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-car-
rying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on
handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consump-
tion. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you are
using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment
has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you
employ the requisite driving habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by
trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes,
the hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in
accordance with your trailer’s characteristics and operating
conditions.
Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction
caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about addi-
tional requirements such as towing kits, etc.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
183
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
■ GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
combination weight. The gross
combination weight is the sum
of the total vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment
installed on the vehicle) and the
weight of the trailer being towed
(including the cargo in the
trailer).
■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
vehicle weight. The gross vehi-
cle weight is the total weight of
the vehicle. When towing a
trailer, it is the sum of the vehi-
cle weight (including the occu-
pants, cargo and any optional
equipment installed on the vehi-
cle) and the tongue weight.
Towing related terms
184
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
axle weight. The gross axle
weight is the load placed on
each axle (front and rear).
■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
trailer weight. The gross trailer
weight is the sum of the trailer
weight and the weight of the
cargo in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming
base vehicle with one driver,
one front passenger, towing
package (if available), hitch and
hitch systems (if required).
Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will
reduce the trailer weight rating so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR and
GAWR.
If the gross trailer weight exceeds 3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recommended
to use a trailer with 2 or more axles.
Front GAWR
Rear GAWR
(With brakes)
186
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
● The gross trailer weight must never exceed 8100 lb. (3675 kg).
● The gross combination weight must never exceed 14400 lb.
(6532 kg).
● The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the GVWR indi-
cated on the Certification Label.
● The gross axle weight on each
axle must never exceed the
GAWR indicated on the Certifi-
cation Label.
● If the gross trailer weight is over
the unbraked TWR, trailer ser-
vice brakes are required.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control
device with sufficient capacity is required.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distrib-
uting hitch with sufficient capacity is required.
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross
vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the
limits.
■ GCWR*
14400 lb. (6532 kg)
■ TWR*
8100 lb. (3675 kg)
■ Unbraked TWR*
1000 lb. (454 kg)
Weight limits
GCWR, TWR and Unbraked TWR
*: This model meets the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE Interna-
tional per SAE J2807.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
187
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
● A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types
of trailers or towing as described below.
● To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must
be loaded by referring to the following instructions.
• Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue
weight is 9 % to 11 %. (Tongue weight/Gross trailer weight × 100
= 9 % to 11 %)
Gross trailer weight
Tongue weight
If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front
axle to the same weight as before the trailer connection.
If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the
front fender height above the front axle before connection. Adjust
weight distributing hitch torque until front fender is returned to the
same height as before connection.
The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight
can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weigh-
ing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk
yard, etc.
Trailer Tongue Weight
1
2
188
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Toyota rec-
ommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.
● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight require-
ment of your vehicle.
● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.
● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After
removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to
prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.
Remove the clip.
Grasp the lower edge of the
hitch cover and raise the cover.
When reattaching the cover,
reverse the steps listed.
Hitch
Removing hitch cover
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
189
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross
trailer weight rating of the trailer.
Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer cou-
pler. Most couplers are stamped
with the required trailer ball size.
Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut by at least 2
threads.
Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.
Selecting trailer ball
1
2
Trailer class Typical trailer ball size
IV
2 5/16 in.
II and III
2 in.
I
1 7/8 in.
3
4
190
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
Hitch receiver pin hole position:
45.3 in. (1151 mm)
Use the wire harness stored in the
rear end under the vehicle body.
Please consult your dealer when
installing trailer lights, as incorrect
installation may cause damage to
the vehicle’s lights. Please take
care to comply with your state’s
laws when installing trailer lights.
■ Service connector for towing brake controller
Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for the trailer brake control-
ler. Please consult your dealer when installing trailer brake systems to the
vehicle.
Positions for towing hitch receiver
1
Connecting trailer lights
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
191
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid
an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when
towing:
● Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not
exceed the posted towing speed limit.
● Toyota recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph
(104 km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the
posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set
forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability
of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as
speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.
● Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-
trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in
an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel
of the vehicle-trailer combination.
● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing
without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have
someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an acci-
dent.
● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-
vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h)
of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jack-
knifing and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or
slippery surfaces.
Trailer towing tips
192
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making
a turn.
● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making
a wider than normal turning radius.
● Slow down before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery
surfaces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.
● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires consider-
able distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of
your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing
lanes.
● To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system perfor-
mance when using engine braking, do not put the transmission in
D.
If in the S mode, the transmission shift range position must be in 6
or lower. (→P. 205)
● Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long
downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do
not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long down-
hill grades.
● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes
too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may over-
heat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving
up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge
indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in
use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
(→P. 554)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
193
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do
so only after performing the following:
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and
trailer’s wheels.
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Shift into P and turn off the engine.
● When restarting after parking on a slope:
With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal pressed.
Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.
Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or
back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
Have someone retrieve the blocks.
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
194
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
■ Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height
■ Before towing
Check that the following conditions are met:
● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (→P. 566)
● Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommen-
dation.
● All trailer lights work as required by law.
● All lights work each time you connect them.
● The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
● The trailer is level when it is hitched.
Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight,
overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or
local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for tow-
ing purposes.
■ Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components
(such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Toyota rec-
ommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for
over 500 miles (800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start
towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed
of less than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle
acceleration.
No matter which class of tow hitch
applies, for a more safe trailer hookup,
the trailer ball setup must be the proper
height for the coupler on the trailer.
Coupler
Trailer ball
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
195
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. (See “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Services
Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.)
● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately
600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
■ If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can
adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.
● If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle
and trailer should stabilize. (if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can also help to
stabilize the vehicle and trailer.)
● After the trailer swaying has stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred
is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the
towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.
WARNING
■ Trailer towing precautions
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance
with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so
could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability
and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and
performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing
a trailer.
196
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
■ To avoid accident or injury
● Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device
with sufficient capacity is required.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing
hitch with sufficient capacity is required.
● Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads
as close to the trailer axle as possible.
● Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the
speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual,
whichever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross-
winds, on wet or slippery surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you
experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow
down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of
which you experience the instability.
● Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.
● Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery sur-
faces.
● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight,
gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.
● Do not use cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control when trailer tow-
ing.
● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long
downhill grades.
● Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long down hills. Before
descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do
not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill
grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the
brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result
in reduced braking efficiency.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
197
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
WARNING
■ Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the
hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of
towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight
rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum
weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight
rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting
in death or serious personal injuries.
■ When towing a trailer
Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable fed-
eral and state/provincial regulations.
● If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are
required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all appli-
cable federal and state/provincial regulations.
● Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehi-
cle’s braking effectiveness.
● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both
the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch
ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
NOTICE
■ When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install
the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
■ Do not directly splice trailer lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage
your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.
199
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Engine (ignition) switch
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started.
Press the engine switch shortly
and firmly.
When operating the engine switch,
one short, firm press is enough.
It is not necessary to press and
hold the switch.
The engine will crank until it starts
or for up to 30 seconds, whichever
is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is completely
started.
The engine can be started from
any engine switch mode.
Performing the following operations when carrying the elec-
tronic key on your person starts the engine or changes engine
switch modes.
Starting the engine
1
2
3
4
200
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
Stop the vehicle.
Set the parking brake (→P. 212), and shift the shift lever to P.
Press the engine switch.
Release the brake pedal and check that the display on the instru-
ment cluster is off.
Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with brake
pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off
*
The emergency flashers can be
used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can be
used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off the
engine, the engine switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode, not
to OFF.
Stopping the engine
Changing engine switch modes
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
201
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,
the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to
ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the
switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” is displayed on the multi-information
display and then press the engine switch once.
Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” on the multi-information display is off.
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-
TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the
shift lever in P, the engine switch will automatically turn off. However, this
function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long peri-
ods of time when the engine is not running.
■ Operation of the engine switch
● If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the engine switch mode may
not change or the engine may not start.
● If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine
switch off, the engine may not start in some cases. After turning the engine
off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the engine.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
→P. 104
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P. 128
■ Note for the entry function
→P. 129
■ If the engine does not start
● The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 73)
Contact your Toyota dealer.
● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the
shift lever is displaced out of P.
A message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other
than P
1
2
3
4
202
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Steering lock
After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the
steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the
engine switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be sus-
pended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time.
In this case, refrain from running the engine. After about 10 seconds, the
steering lock motor will resume functioning.
■ When “Smart Key System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual” is dis-
played on the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer, immediately.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
→P. 487
■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
→P. 548
A message will be displayed on the multi-
information display.
Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press
the engine switch while turning the steer-
ing wheel left and right.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
203
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
WARNING
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the
steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
● If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession. (→P. 509)
However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emer-
gency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or
braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will
make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
● If the engine switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning
message will be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer
sounds.
● When restarting the engine after it was turned off while driving, shift the
shift lever to N and press the engine switch.
204
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode
for long periods of time without the engine running.
● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is displayed on the multi-information
display, the engine switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle, always
check that the engine switch is off.
● Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If
the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will
not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehi-
cle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch
If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual,
such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact
your Toyota dealer immediately.
205
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Automatic transmission
While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, move the
shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that
the vehicle is completely stopped.
*
1
: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for
the driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recom-
mended for normal driving.
*
2
: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possi-
ble gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unneces-
sary upshifting.
Shifting the shift lever
Shift position purpose
Shift position Purpose and condition
P Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R Reversing
N
Neutral
(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)
D Normal driving*
1
S S mode driving*
2
(→P. 207)
206
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving and
operating conditions.
■ Power mode
For powerful acceleration and
driving in mountainous regions.
Press the button again to cancel
power mode.
■
Second start mode
For starting on slippery road
surfaces, such as on snow.
Press the button again to cancel
second start mode.
Selecting a driving mode
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
207
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever can be oper-
ated as follows:
Upshifting
Downshifting
The selected shift range will be
displayed in the meter.
The initial shift range in S mode is
set automatically to 6, 5 or 4
according to vehicle speed. How-
ever, the initial shift range may be
set to 3 or 2 if AI-SHIFT has oper-
ated while the shift lever was in
the D position. (→P. 208)
■ Shift ranges and their functions
● Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 8 according to vehi-
cle speed and driving conditions. But, the gear is limited accord-
ing to selected shift range.
● You can choose from 8 levels of engine braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than
a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.
Changing shift ranges in S mode
1
2
208
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Driving on a downhill
On declines, there may be case where the vehicle shifts down automatically
to obtain engine braking. As a result of the downshifting, the engine speed
may increase.
■ Second start mode automatic deactivation
Second start mode is automatically deactivated if the engine is turned off after
driving in second start mode.
■ S mode
When the shift range is 7 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the
shift range to 8.
■ AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver perfor-
mance and driving conditions.
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
(Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
■ When driving with cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control acti-
vated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate because cruise control or radar
cruise control will not be canceled.
● While driving in S mode, downshifting to 7, 6, 5 or 4. (→P. 263, 275)
● When switching the driving mode to power mode while driving in D position.
(→P. 206)
■ Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift
lever in starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in IGNI-
TION ON mode and the brake pedal is being depressed.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
209
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may
be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer, immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
Set the parking brake.
Turn the engine switch off.
Depress the brake pedal.
■ If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to
S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ Downshift restriction warning buzzer (S mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
Pry the cover up with a flathead screw-
driver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the
button is pressed.
1
2
3
4
5
210
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.
■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking
brake and depress the brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal
when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted
out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
211
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Turn signal lever
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions of
the driver:
Right turn
Lane change to the right (push
and hold the lever partway)
The right hand signals will flash
until you release the lever.
Lane change to the left (push
and hold the lever partway)
The left hand signals will flash until
you release the lever.
Left turn
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
Operating instructions
1
2
3
4
212
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
Parking brake
Sets the parking brake
Fully set the parking brake while
depressing the brake pedal.
Releases the parking brake
Slightly raise the lever and lower it
completely while pressing the but-
ton.
■ Parking the vehicle
→P. 166
■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged.
A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display.
■ Usage in winter time
→P. 375
1
2
NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
213
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
Headlight switch
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
The daytime running
lights turn off.
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate,
instrument panel lights,
and daytime running
lights (→P. 215) turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above
(except daytime running
lights) turn on.
The headlights, day-
time running lights
(→P. 215) and all lights
listed above turn on
and off automatically
(when the engine
switch is in IGNITION
ON mode).
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
1
2
3
4
214
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
With the headlights on, push
the lever forward to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
Release the lever to turn them off.
You can flash the high beams with
the headlights on or off.
Turning on the high beam headlights
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
215
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
■ Daytime running light system
● The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the headlights
and illuminate dimmer than the headlights.
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving,
the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following
conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at
night.)
• The engine is running
• The parking brake is released
• The headlight switch is in the or “AUTO”
* position
*: When the surroundings are bright
The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking
brake is set again.
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the
switch.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system
offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve
fuel economy.
■ Headlight control sensor
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 sec-
onds after a door is opened and closed if the engine switch has been
switched to ACCESSORY or OFF mode.
● When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
engine switch is switched to ACCESSORY or OFF mode and driver’s door
is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, or
turn the light switch off once and then back to the or position.
■ Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the
headlights do not interfere with other road users.
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the
windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
216
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ Welcome lighting
If the headlight switch is turned to and the surrounding area is dark,
unlocking the doors using the smart key system or wireless remote control
will turn the parking lights and tail lights on automatically.
■ If the automatic headlight leveling system warning light flashes
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY or OFF
mode and the driver’ door is opened while the tail lights are turned on.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 582)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
217
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
Automatic High Beam
The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to
assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of vehicles
ahead etc., and automatically turns the high beam on or off as
necessary.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam
Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and turning the high beam on or off manually if
necessary.
■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ Notes when using the Automatic High Beam system
Vehicles without PCS (Pre-Collision System):
● Do not spill liquid onto the inside rear view mirror or the camera sensor.
● Do not apply window tinting or stickers to the camera sensor or the area of
windshield near the camera sensor.
● Do not place items on the dashboard. There is a possibility that the cam-
era sensor will mistake items reflected in the windshield for streetlights,
the headlights of other vehicles, etc.
● Do not install a parking tag or any other accessories near or around the
inside rear view mirror and the camera sensor.
● Do not modify the vehicle.
● Do not replace windshield with a non-genuine windshield.
Contact your Toyota dealer.
Vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision System):
→P. 238
Observe the following to ensure that the
Automatic High Beam functions correctly.
● Do not touch the camera sensor.
● Do not subject the inside rear view mir-
ror or the camera sensor to a strong
impact.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
218
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Push the lever away from you
with the headlight switch in the
or position.
Press the Automatic High
Beam switch.
The Automatic High Beam indica-
tor will come on when the head-
lights are turned on automatically
to indicate that the system is
active.
■
Switching to low beam
Pull the lever to original posi-
tion.
The Automatic High Beam indi-
cator will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to
activate the Automatic High
Beam system again.
■
Switching to high beam
Press the Automatic High
Beam switch.
The Automatic High Beam indi-
cator will turn off and the high
beam indicator will turn on.
Press the switch to activate the
Automatic High Beam system
again.
Activating the Automatic High Beam system
1
2
Turning the high beam on/off manually
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
219
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
■ High beam automatic turning on or off conditions
● When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be auto-
matically turned on (after approximately 1 second):
• Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
● If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automat-
ically turned off:
• Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.
■ Camera sensor detection information
● The high beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situa-
tions:
• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road
dividers or roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear from the faraway lane on wide road
• When vehicles ahead have no lights
● The high beam may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights
without using the headlights is detected.
● Houselights, streetlights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs
may cause the high beam to switch to the low beams, or the low beams to
remain on.
● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn the high
beam on or off:
• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead
• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface
etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of baggage
● The high beam may be turned on or off when the driver does not expect it.
● Bicycles or similar objects may not be detected.
220
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
● In the situations shown below, the system may not be able to accurately
detect surrounding brightness levels. This may cause the low beams to
remain on or the high beams to cause problems for pedestrians, vehicles
ahead or other parties. In these cases, manually switch between the high
and low beams.
• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.)
• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc.
• The windshield is cracked or damaged.
• The inside rear view mirror or camera sensor is deformed or dirty.
• The camera sensor temperature is extremely high.
• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights
or fog lights.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights that are either switched off, dirty, are
changing color, or are not aimed properly.
• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and
darkness
• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or
roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved
roads, gravel tracks etc.)
• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding
road
• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or
a mirror.
• The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on a
truck.
• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly.
• The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.
• The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between in
an abnormal manner.
• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or dis-
tress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby.
■ If a warning message of the Automatic High Beam is displayed...
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
221
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
■ Temporary lowering sensor sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.
Vehicles without PCS (Pre-Collision System):
To lower the sensitivity, push and hold on the inside rear view mirror for
15 to 20 seconds, and release. The indicator light on the inside rear view mir-
ror will flash to indicate that the sensitivity has been lowered.
When the engine switch is turned off, the sensitivity will be returned to its nor-
mal level.
Vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision System):
Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.
• The headlight switch is in .
• The headlight switch lever is in low beam position.
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Within 30 seconds after , repeat pushing the headlight switch lever to
the high beam position then pulling it to the low beam position quickly 10
times, then leave the lever in high beam position.
Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even the vehicle is stopped.
1
2
3 2
222
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch
Turns the fog lights off
Turns the fog lights on
■ Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving con-
ditions, such as in rain and fog.
1
2
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
223
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
Windshield wipers and washer
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
Intermittent operation
Low speed operation
High speed operation
Temporary operation
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is
selected.
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Operating the wiper lever
1
2
3
4
5
6
224
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
Rain-sensing windshield wipers
Rain-sensing operation
(“AUTO”)
Low speed operation
High speed operation
Temporary operation
When “AUTO” is selected, the
wipers will operate automatically
when the sensor detects falling
rain. The system automatically
adjusts wiper timing in accor-
dance with rain volume and
vehicle speed.
7
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
225
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted when “AUTO” is selected.
Increases the sensitivity
Decreases the sensitivity
Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers operate automati-
cally. (After operating several
times, the wipers operate one
more time after a short delay to
prevent dripping.)
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
● If the wiper switch is turned to the “AUTO” position while the engine switch is
in IGNITION ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show that “AUTO”
mode is activated.
● When the sensor sensitivity ring is turned toward high while in “AUTO”
mode, the wipers will operate once to indicate that the sensor sensitivity is
enhanced.
● If the temperature of the rain drop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or -22°F
(-30°C) or lower, the automatic operation may not occur. In this case, oper-
ate the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.
5
6
7
● The raindrop sensor judges the amount
of raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are
present on the windshield.
226
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode (vehi-
cles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or
the windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your
fingers etc. anything else does not become caught in the windshield wipers.
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes
warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled
toward you and held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
228
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If no washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
washer fluid reservoir.
NOTICE
■ When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
229
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
Headlight cleaner switch
∗
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
■ The headlight cleaners can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight switch is
turned on.
∗: If equipped
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
230
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
● Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and win-
dows are closed.
● Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types
→P. 568
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
Before refueling the vehicle
WARNING
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
231
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
WARNING
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle’s painted surface.
232
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-4. Refueling
Pull the lever.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
Opening the fuel tank cap
1
2
3
Closing the fuel tank cap
234
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Toyota Safety Sense P
∗
◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System)
→P. 241
◆ LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
→P. 254
◆ Dynamic radar cruise control
→P. 263
◆ Automatic High Beam
→P. 217
∗: If equipped
The Toyota Safety Sense P consists of the following drive assist
systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving expe-
rience:
WARNING
■ Toyota Safety Sense P
The Toyota Safety Sense P is designed to operate under the assumption
that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to
the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in
normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control perfor-
mance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The
driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surround-
ings and driving safely.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
235
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer
that will record certain data, such as:
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the pre-collision system functions
• Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects)
• Images from the camera sensor (available only when the pre-colli-
sion braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was
operating)
The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or
images of the inside of the vehicle.
● Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose
malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve
quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the
lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a
government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific
vehicle or vehicle owner
● Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device.
The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the func-
tion is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates
will not be available.
Vehicle data recording
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
237
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to
an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.
● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or
other items to the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a
strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding
area.
● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and
installed, or replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
Radar sensor
Front grille emblem
If the front of the radar sensor or the
front or back of the front grille emblem
is dirty or covered with water droplets,
snow, etc., clean it.
Clean the radar sensor and front grille
emblem with a soft cloth so you do not
mark or damage them.
1
2
238
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to
an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets,
snow, etc., clear the windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be neces-
sary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from
the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
• If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed
is dirty, contact your Toyota dealer.
● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or
covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove
the fog, condensation or ice. (→P. 380)
● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the wind-
shield in front of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the
wiper insert or wiper blade.
If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your
Toyota dealer.
● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not get the camera sensor wet.
● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.
● Do not attach objects, such as stickers,
transparent stickers, etc., and so forth,
to the outer side of the windshield in
front of the camera sensor (shaded
area in the illustration).
A: From the top of the windshield to
approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the
bottom of the camera sensor
B: Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)
(Approximately 4.0 in. (10 cm) to the
right and left from the center of the
camera sensor)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
239
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
WARNING
● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to
contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.
● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or
remove it.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor
(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the
hood, front grille or front bumper. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.
● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure
that it will not obstruct the camera sensor.
● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.
241
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
∗
∗: If equipped
The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sen-
sor to detect vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle.
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal col-
lision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to
urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake
pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the
system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with
a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are auto-
matically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the
impact of the collision.
The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning
timing can be changed. (→P. 245)
242
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
◆ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal
collision is high, a buzzer will
sound and a warning message
will be displayed on the multi-
information display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.
◆ Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal colli-
sion is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to
how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.
◆ Pre-collision braking
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal colli-
sion is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes
are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the
collision speed.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
243
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
WARNING
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations
under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen
collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this sys-
tem. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce
the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to vari-
ous conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve
the same level of performance.
Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system
and always drive carefully.
• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no pos-
sibility of a collision: →P. 247
• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: →P. 250
● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as
the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of
braking force will be applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking func-
tion, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after
approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.
● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are
performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed
strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine
that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-colli-
sion braking function from operating.
● In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating,
operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is
depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system deter-
mines that the driver is taking evasive action.
● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of
the pre-collision braking function.
244
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ When to disable the pre-collision system
In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate prop-
erly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of
transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires
are allowed to rotate freely
● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dyna-
mometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel bal-
ancer
● When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to
an accident or other reasons
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehi-
cle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than specified are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or cam-
era sensor is temporarily installed to the vehicle
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
245
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Disabling the pre-collision system
Press the PCS switch for 3 sec-
onds or more.
The PCS warning light will turn
on and a message will be dis-
played on the multi-information
display.
To enable the system, press the
PCS switch again.
The system is enabled each
time the engine switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode.
■
Changing the pre-collision warning timing
Press the PCS switch to display the current warning timing on the
multi-information display. Each time the PCS switch is pressed with
the warning timing displayed, the warning timing will change as fol-
lows.
The operation timing setting is retained when the engine switch is
turned off.
Far
The warning will begin to oper-
ate earlier than with the default
timing.
Middle
This is the default setting.
Near
The warning will begin to oper-
ate later than with the default
timing.
Changing settings of the pre-collision system
1
2
3
246
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the pos-
sibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.
Each function is operational at the following speeds:
● Pre-collision warning:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h).
(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and
50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 110 mph (30 and
180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approx-
imately 20 and 50 mph [30 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h).
(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and
50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
The system may not operate in the following situations:
● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
● If the shift lever is in R
● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be opera-
tional)
● If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator is illuminated (only the pre-colli-
sion warning function will be operational)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
247
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Pedestrian detection function
■ Cancelation of the pre-collision braking
If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is oper-
ating, it will be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no pos-
sibility of a collision
● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that
there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.
• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian
• When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes
The pre-collision system detects pedestri-
ans based on the size, profile, and motion
of a detected object. However, a pedes-
trian may not be detected depending on
the surrounding brightness and the
motion, posture, and angle of the
detected object, preventing the system
from operating properly. (→P. 252)
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle
that is making a left/right turn
• When passing a vehicle in an oncom-
ing lane that is stopped to make a
right/left turn
248
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road sur-
face is uneven or undulating
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility
poles, trees, or walls
• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a
tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a
protrusion on the road surface or roadside
• When driving on a road where relative
location to vehicle ahead in an adja-
cent lane may change, such as on a
winding road
• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian,
or object by the roadside at the
entrance of a curve
• When a crossing pedestrian
approaches very close to the vehicle
• When passing through a place with a
low structure above the road (low ceil-
ing, traffic sign, etc.)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
249
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
• When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier,
or other barrier that opens and closes
• When using an automatic car wash
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mis-
taken for a vehicle or pedestrian
• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large
truck or guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant,
or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be
present
• When passing under an object (bill-
board, etc.) at the top of an uphill road
• When driving through or under
objects that may contact the vehicle,
such as thick grass, tree branches, or
a banner
250
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly
● In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by
the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating
properly:
• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle
• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car
• If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead
• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving,
acceleration or deceleration)
• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle
• When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a
sandstorm
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes sud-
denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear
end, such as a low bed trailer
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
ground clearance
• When a vehicle ahead is not directly
in front of your vehicle
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
251
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
• When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming
traffic, shines directly into the camera sensor
• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at
night or in a tunnel
• After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain
amount of time
• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/
right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor
• The vehicle is wobbling.
• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.
• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned
● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be
obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:
• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when
the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively
worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery sur-
face
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or
lowered
252
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar
sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
• Pedestrians shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approx-
imately 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), mak-
ing their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc.,
hiding part of their body
• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting
• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehi-
cle
• Groups of pedestrians which are close together
• Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright
• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel
• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or
brightness as their surroundings
• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects
• Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.)
on the road
• Pedestrians who are walking fast
• Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly
• Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object
• Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside
rear view mirror, etc.)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
253
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ If the PCS warning light flashes and a warning message is displayed on
the multi-information display
The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a
malfunction in the system.
● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will
disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating
conditions return:
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sen-
sor is hot, such as in the sun
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sen-
sor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment
• When the radar sensor or front grille emblem is dirty or covered with
snow, etc.
• When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged
up or covered with condensation or ice
(Defogging the windshield: →P. 385)
• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a
sticker is attached to the windshield near the camera sensor
● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or remains illuminated or the
warning message does not disappear even though the vehicle has returned
to normal, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (→P. 365), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision
braking functions are also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake
System Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
254
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
∗
When driving on roads with white (yellow) lines, this function alerts the
driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane.
The LDA system recognizes visi-
ble white (yellow) lines with the
camera sensor on the upper por-
tion of the front windshield.
◆ Lane departure alert function
When the system determines
that the vehicle might depart
from its lane, a warning is dis-
played on the multi-information
display and the warning buzzer
sounds to alert the driver.
When the warning buzzer
sounds, check the surrounding
road situation and carefully
operate the steering wheel to
move the vehicle back to the
center of the lane.
∗: If equipped
Summary of functions
Functions included in LDA system
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
255
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
◆ Vehicle sway warning function
When the vehicle is swaying or
appears as if it may depart from
its lane multiple times, the
warning buzzer sounds and a
message is displayed on the
multi-information display to alert
the driver.
WARNING
■ Before using LDA system
Do not rely solely upon the LDA system. The LDA system does not auto-
matically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be
paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full
responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surround-
ing conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the
vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as
from driving for a long period of time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
256
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ To avoid operating LDA system by mistake
When not using the LDA system, use the LDA switch to turn the system off.
■ Situations unsuitable for LDA system
Do not use the LDA system in the following situations.
The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.
● Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are
present on the side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc. are present due to
road repair.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction
work.
● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.
■ Preventing LDA system malfunctions and operations performed by
mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the
lights.
● Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be
replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a
grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
257
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Press the LDA switch to turn the
LDA system on.
The LDA indicator illuminates.
Press the LDA switch again to turn
the LDA system off.
When the LDA system is turned on
or off, operation of the LDA system
continues in the same condition
the next time the engine is started.
Turning LDA system on
258
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lane departure alert function dis-
play
Displayed when the multi-informa-
tion display is switched to the driv-
ing assist system information
screen.
Indications on multi-information display
Inside of displayed white lines
is white
Inside of displayed white lines
is black
Indicates that the system is recog-
nizing white (yellow) lines. When
the vehicle departs from its lane,
the white line displayed on the
side the vehicle departs from
flashes orange.
Indicates that the system is not
able to recognize white (yellow)
lines or is temporarily canceled.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
259
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Operation conditions of each function
● Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LDA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a
radius of more than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 261)
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in Settings display of the multi-information
display is set to “On”. (→P. 89)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 261)
■ Temporary cancelation of functions
When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily
canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation
of the function is automatically restored. (→P. 259)
■ Lane departure alert function
The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio play-
back, etc.
■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road
The LDA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines
could not be recognized.
260
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly
In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow)
lines and various functions may not operate normally.
● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white
(yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front
of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement
marker” or stones are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand,
etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than
lines that are white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly,
such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the
camera.
● The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.
● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having
improper tire pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions
during driving (poor roads or road seams).
● The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the
beam axis has deviated.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
261
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Warning message
If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display
and the LDA indicator turns off, follow the appropriate troubleshooting proce-
dure.
If a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed
on the screen.
Warning message Details/Actions
“Lane Departure
Alert
Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer”
The system may not be operating
properly.
→ Have the vehicle inspected at your
Toyota dealer.
“Forward Camera
System
Unavailable
Clean Windshield”
Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow,
etc. are present on the windshield in
front of the camera sensor.
→ Turn the LDA system off, remove
any dirt, rain, condensation, ice,
snow, etc. from the windshield, and
then turn the LDA system back on.
“Forward Camera
System
Unavailable”
The operation conditions of the cam-
era sensor (temperature, etc.) are not
met.
→ When the operation conditions of
the camera sensor (temperature,
etc.) are met, the LDA system will
become available. Turn the LDA
system off, wait for a little while,
and then turn the LDA system back
on.
“Lane Departure Alert Unavail-
able”
The LDA system is temporarily can-
celed due to a malfunction in a sensor
other than the camera sensor.
→ Turn the LDA system off and follow
the appropriate troubleshooting
procedures for the warning mes-
sage. Afterward, drive the vehicle
for a short time, and then turn the
LDA system back on.
“Lane Departure
Alert
Unavailable
Below Approx
32 MPH”
The LDA system cannot be used as
the vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 32 mph (50 km/h).
→ Drive the vehicle at approximately
32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
262
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Customization
The following settings can be changed.
For how to change settings, refer to P. 582.
Function Setting details
Lane departure alert function Adjust alert sensitivity
Vehicle sway warning function
Turn function on and off
Adjust alert sensitivity
263
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Dynamic radar cruise control
∗
In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically
accelerates and decelerates to match the speed changes of the pre-
ceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In con-
stant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control on freeways and highways.
● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (→P. 266)
● Constant speed control mode (→P. 271)
Indicators
Display
Set speed
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch
Cruise control switch
∗: If equipped
Summary of functions
1
2
3
4
5
264
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the
system, and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your sur-
roundings.
The dynamic radar cruise control provides driving assistance to reduce the
driver’s burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.
Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road
conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking
the set speed.
Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preced-
ing vehicle as detected by the system may differ from the condition
observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert,
assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying on this system
or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance
provided by the system.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in
determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a
designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows care-
less or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in
low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following dis-
tance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of
judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain
vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in
any given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has limited capability to prevent or avoid
a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any
danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle
and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.
■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control activation
Switch the dynamic radar cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button
when not in use.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
265
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
WARNING
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious injury.
● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up
and down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and highways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sen-
sors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar sensor or
camera sensor
● In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and decel-
eration
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
266
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles
up to approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current
vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suit-
able following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long
downhill slopes.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-
vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance switch.
Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed
appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is
necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at
this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle
ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate suffi-
ciently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower
than the set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
267
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will
come on and a message will be
displayed on the multi-information
display.
Press the button again to deacti-
vate the cruise control.
If the “ON-OFF” button is pressed
and held for 1.5 seconds or more,
the system turns on in constant
speed control mode. (→P. 271)
Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to
the desired vehicle speed (at or
above approximately 30 mph
[50 km/h]) and push the lever
down to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will
come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the lever is released becomes the
set speed.
Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
1
2
268
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed
is displayed.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever
up or down to change the speed,
and release when the desired
speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
U.S. mainland and Hawaii
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*
1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*
2
each time
the lever is operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*
1
or 1 km/h
(0.6 mph)
*
2
increments for as long as the lever is held
Guam, Saipan and Puerto Rico
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*
1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*
2
each time
the lever is operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)
*
1
or 5 km/h
(3.1 mph)
*
2
increments for as long as the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (→P. 271), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*
1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*
2
each time
the lever is operated
Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the lever is
held.
*
1
: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
*
2
: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Adjusting the set speed
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
269
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Pressing the switch changes the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as fol-
lows:
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
set automatically to long mode
when the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be
displayed.
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown
correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode)
Preceding
vehicle mark
1
2
3
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
270
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled
when the brake pedal is
depressed.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the cruise control and returns
vehicle speed to the set speed.
However, cruise control does not resume when the vehicle speed is
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.
When your vehicle is too close to
a vehicle ahead, and sufficient
automatic deceleration via the
cruise control is not possible, the
display will flash and the buzzer
will sound to alert the driver. An
example of this would be if
another driver cuts in front of you
while you are following a vehicle.
Depress the brake pedal to
ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-
vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.
● When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds
your vehicle speed
● When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow
speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● When depressing the accelerator pedal
Canceling and resuming the speed control
1
2
Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
271
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will main-
tain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
does not function correctly due to a dirty radar sensor, etc.
With the cruise control off,
press and hold the “ON-OFF”
button for 1.5 seconds or more.
Immediately after the “ON-OFF”
button is pressed, the radar cruise
control indicator will come on.
Afterwards, it switches to the cruise
control indicator.
Switching to constant speed con-
trol mode is only possible when
operating the lever with the cruise
control off.
Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to
the desired vehicle speed (at or
above approximately 25 mph
[40 km/h]) and push the lever
down to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will
come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the lever is released becomes the
set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting: →P. 268
Canceling and resuming the speed setting: →P. 270
Selecting constant speed control mode
1
2
272
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After acceler-
ating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order
to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the fol-
lowing situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● Active TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or Active TRAC system is turned off.
● When second start mode is set.
● The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The center differential lock/unlock is not completed within 5 seconds while
the cruise control system is on.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any
other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota
dealer.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
273
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situa-
tions:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below
the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● Active TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or Active TRAC system is turned off.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The center differential lock/unlock is not completed within 5 seconds while
the cruise control system is on.
If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other rea-
son, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message
is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the
instructions.
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the
brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the
accelerator pedal when acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (→P. 270) may not be activated.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the
detecting of the sensor
274
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
may not function correctly
In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelera-
tor pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system
may not operate properly.
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards
(caused by a heavy load in the luggage
compartment, etc.)
● Preceding vehicle has an extremely high
ground clearance
● When the road curves or when the lanes
are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your
position in the lane is unstable
275
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Cruise control
∗
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come
on.
Press the button again to deacti-
vate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the lever is released becomes the
set speed.
∗: If equipped
Summary of functions
1
2
Setting the vehicle speed
1
2
276
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed
is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired direc-
tion.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*
1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*
2
each time
the lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continu-
ally until the lever is released.
*
1
: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
*
2
: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than approx-
imately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased
by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the
lever down to set the new speed.
Adjusting the set speed
1
2
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
277
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below
the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● The center differential lock/unlock is not completed within 5 seconds while
the cruise control system is on.
● Active TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or Active TRAC system is turned off.
■ If “Cruise Control Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is shown on the multi-
information display
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels imme-
diately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control
system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer (with towing hitch) or during emer-
gency towing
278
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Intuitive parking assist
Front corner sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
On/off
To turn the system on, press the
switch. The indicator light comes
on and the buzzer sounds to inform
the driver that the system is opera-
tional.
To turn the system off, press the
switch again.
The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when paral-
lel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the
sensors and communicated via the multi-information display,
the multimedia screen (if equipped), the navigation system
screen, and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when
using this system.
Types of sensors
1
2
3
Intuitive parking assist switch
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
279
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multi-
information display, navigation system screen depending on the posi-
tion and distance to the obstacle.
Multi-information display
Front corner sensor operation
Rear corner sensor operation
Rear center sensor operation
Navigation system screen
Intuitive parking assist display
When the Multi-terrain Monitor
is not displayed.
A graphic is automatically dis-
played when an obstacle is
detected. The screen can be set so
that the graphic is not displayed.
(→P. 282)
: Select to mute the buzzer
sounds.
Intuitive parking assist
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (if
equipped)
When the Multi-terrain Monitor
is displayed.
A simplified image is displayed on
the upper corner of the screen
when an obstacle is detected.
Display
1
2
3
1
2
3
280
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Distance display
Sensors that detect an obstacle will illuminate continuously or blink.
Sensor detection display, obstacle distance
Multi-
information
display
Navigation
system
screen
Insert
display
Approximate distance to obstacle
Corner sensor
Rear center
sensor
(continu-
ous)
(continu-
ous)
(blinking
slowly)
—
4.9 ft. (150 cm)
to
2.6ft. (80cm)
(continu-
ous)
(continu-
ous)
(blinking)
2.0 ft. (60 cm)
to
1.5 ft. (45 cm)
2.6 ft. (80 cm)
to
2.1ft. (65cm)
(continu-
ous)
(continu-
ous)
(blinking
rapidly)
1.5 ft. (45 cm)
to
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
2.1 ft. (65 cm)
to
1.6ft. (50cm)
(blinking) (continu-
ous)
(continu-
ous)
Less than 1.1ft.
(35 cm)
Less than 1.6 ft
(50 cm).
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
281
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.
● The buzzer sounds faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the
obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously.
• Corner sensors: Approximately 1.1ft. (35 cm)
• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.3 ft. (50 cm)
● When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the
buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both
come within the above distances, the beep will repeat a long
tone, followed by fast beeps.
● You can change the volume of the warning beeps. (→P. 282)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors may not be able to detect
obstacles that are extremely close
to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object etc.
Detection range of the sensors
1
2
3
282
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
You can change the buzzer sounds volume and the screen operating
conditions.
Press the “SETUP” button on the multimedia system or navigation
system.
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen and select “TOYOTA Park
Assist Settings”.
Select the desired item.
The buzzer sounds volume
can be adjusted.
On or off can be selected for intuitive parking assist display.
Front or rear center sensors display and tone indication can be
set.
Setting up intuitive parking assist
1
2
3
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
283
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
● Front corner sensors:
• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P.
• The vehicle speed is less than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Rear corner and rear center sensors:
• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in R.
■ Intuitive parking assist display
When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor system, Multi-ter-
rain Monitor is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the upper corner of
the screen even if the display setting has been set to off.
■ Sensor detection information
● The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s
bumper.
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where
this may occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve
this problem.)
• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an
abnormal display, or obstacles may not be detected.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle
engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultra-
sonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the
vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
• A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of
their shape, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer
than they are.
284
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay par-
ticular attention to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
• Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of
your vehicle
● The following situations may occur during use.
• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection
distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.
• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even
at slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the
sensor’s detection areas before the display is shown and the buzzer
sounds.
• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when
approached, even if they have been detected once.
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air
flow noise of the air conditioning system.
■ If “Clean Parking Assist Sensor” is displayed on the multi-information
display
A sensor may be dirty or covered with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is
removed from the sensor, the system should return to normal.
Also, due to the sensor being frozen at low temperatures, a malfunction dis-
play may appear or an obstacle may not be detected. If the sensor thaws out,
the system should return to normal.
■ If “Parking Assist Malfunction” is displayed on the multi-information dis-
play
Depending on the malfunction of the sensor, the device may not be working
normally. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. buzzer sounds volume) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 582)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
285
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
WARNING
■ When using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely
and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving
forward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially
the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to
control the vehicle’s speed.
● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.
NOTICE
■ When using intuitive parking assist
In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a
sensor malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.
● A buzzer does not sound when you turn the intuitive parking assist on.
● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a buzzer sounds
when no obstacles are detected.
● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to
strong impact.
● If the bumper collides with something, except when the buzzer mute
switch has been turned on.
● If the display shows continuously without a beep.
● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.
If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is
likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
286
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Four-wheel drive system
H4 (high speed position)
Normal driving on all types of
roads.
L4 (low speed position)
Driving requiring maximum power
and traction such as climbing or
descending steep hills, off-road
driving, and hard pulling in sand or
mud, etc.
The low speed four-wheel drive
indicator will come on.
Use the four-wheel drive control switch and center differential
lock/unlock switch to select the following transfer and center
differential modes.
Four-wheel drive control switch
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
287
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Lock the center differential when
your vehicle’s wheels get stuck in
a ditch or when driving on a slip-
pery or bumpy surface.
The center differential lock indica-
tor will come on.
Unlock the center differential after
the wheels have been freed, or
after moving to a flat, non-slippery
surface.
To unlock the center differential, push the switch again.
■
Shifting from H4 to L4
Stop the vehicle completely with brake pedal held down.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Push and turn the four-wheel drive control switch fully clockwise.
Maintain this condition until the low speed four-wheel drive indicator
turns on.
■
Shifting from L4 to H4
Stop the vehicle completely with brake pedal held down.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Push and shift the four-wheel drive control switch to H4.
Maintain this condition until the low speed four-wheel drive indicator
turns off.
Center differential lock/unlock switch
Shifting between H4 and L4
1
2
3
1
2
3
288
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ The four-wheel drive control switch can be operated when
● The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● The shift lever is in the N position.
● The vehicle is stopped completely.
■ The low speed four-wheel drive indicator light
The indicator light blinks while shifting between H4 and L4.
■ Advice for driving on slippery roads
● If you shift the four-wheel drive control switch to L4 and the shift lever to the
2 range of S while driving in steep off-road areas, the output of the brake
can be controlled effectively by the Active TRAC, which assists the driver to
control the driving power of 4 wheels.
● Use the 1 range of S of the shift lever for maximum power and traction when
your wheels get stuck or when driving down a steep incline.
■ The center differential lock indicator light
The indicator light blinks while locking/unlocking the center differential.
■ The center differential lock/unlock switch can be operated when
● The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● The vehicle speed is less than 62 mph (100 km/h).
■ Locking/unlocking the center differential
● When the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4 with the center differential
locked, VSC is automatically turned off. (The center differential lock and
VSC OFF indicator lights come on.)
● If the operation is not completed, the center differential lock indicator blinks.
If the indicator light does not turn off when unlocking the center differential,
drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
● If the center differential lock/unlock is not completed within 5 seconds while
the cruise control system is on, cancel the cruise control system.
■ If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential
lock indicator light blinks
● If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light continues to blink when
using the four-wheel drive control switch, stop the vehicle completely, move
the shift lever to N and operate the switch again.
● If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator
turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer
mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time,
the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in
P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the
shifting of the transfer mode.
To complete the shifting, stop the vehicle completely, return the shift lever to
N, and confirm that the shift was completed (the indicator turns on/off).
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
289
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
● If the engine coolant temperature is too low, the four-wheel drive control
system may not be able to shift. When the engine is warmer press the
switch again.
If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock
indicator light continues to blink even after attempting the above, there may
be a malfunction in the engine, the brake system or the four-wheel drive sys-
tem. In this case, you may not be able to shift between H4 and L4, and the
center differential lock may not be operable. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer immediately.
WARNING
■ While driving
Never move the four-wheel drive control switch if the wheels have lost trac-
tion. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is parked
If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator
turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer
mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time,
the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in
P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the
shifting of the transfer mode.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the center differential
● For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, unlock the center differ-
ential.
● Unlock the center differential after the wheels are out of the ditch or off the
slippery or bumpy surface.
● Do not push the center differential lock/unlock switch when the vehicle is
turning or when its wheels are spinning freely off the ground.
290
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Crawl Control (with Turn Assist function)
ON/OFF switch
Speed selection switch
Indicators
The Crawl Control indicator and
Multi-terrain Select indicator are lit
and the slip indicator flashes when
operating.
Multi-information display
The operating status and speed
select status of the Crawl Control
are shown on the multi-information
display.
Allows travel on extremely rough off-road surfaces at a fixed low
speed without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal. Mini-
mizes loss of traction or vehicle slip when driving on slippery
road surfaces, helping for stable driving.
Crawl Control switch
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
291
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
The following table shows some
typical terrains and the recom-
mended speed modes.
This function assists cornering performance in accordance with steer-
ing operation when driving through a tight corner. It maintains vehicle
speed while driving and reduces the number of turns needed to navi-
gate a corner that requires turning the wheel in the opposite direction.
Press the Turn Assist switch while
Crawl Control is operating.
Turn Assist indicator will come on.
To turn the system off, press the
switch again.
Speed modes
Mode Road condition
Lo
Rock, mogul (downhill) and gravel
(downhill)
Lo-Med
Mogul (uphill)
Med
Snow, mud, gravel (uphill), sand,
dirt, mogul (uphill) and grass
Med-Hi
Hi
Turn Assist function
1
2
3
4
5
292
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Crawl Control
Press the ON/OFF switch while Crawl Control is operating. If the
switch is turned off, the slip indicator and the Turn Assist indicator will
go off (if the Turn Assist function is in use), the Crawl Control indicator
will flash until the system has turned off completely, and a message
stating that Crawl Control has been turned off will be displayed on the
multi-information display for several seconds.
When turning off Crawl Control while driving, stop the vehicle before
the Crawl Control indicator turns off, or drive extremely carefully.
Turn Assist function
Press the Turn Assist switch while the Turn Assist function is operat-
ing. When the switch is pressed, the Turn Assist indicator will go off,
and a message stating that the Turn Assist function has been turned
off will be displayed on the multi-information display for several sec-
onds.
■ The Crawl Control and Turn Assist function can be operated when
Crawl Control
● The engine is running.
● The shift lever is in any gear other than P or N.
● The four-wheel drive control switch is in L4.
● The driver’s door is closed.
Turn Assist function
● Crawl Control is operating.
● The center differential is not locked.
● The accelerator and brake are not being operated.
● The shift lever is in any gear other than P, R or N.
● The steering wheel is turned very far.
When the system is turned off
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
293
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Automatic system cancelation
Crawl Control
In the following situations, the buzzer will sound intermittently and Crawl Con-
trol will be canceled automatically. In this event, the Crawl Control indicator
will flash and then go off, the Turn Assist indicator will go off (if the Turn Assist
function is in use), and a message stating that Crawl Control has been turned
off will be displayed on the multi-information display for several seconds.
● When the shift lever is moved to P or N.
● When the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4.
● When the driver’s door is opened.
Turn Assist function
When the center differential is locked, the buzzer will sound intermittently and
the Turn Assist function will be canceled automatically. In this event, the Turn
Assist indicator will go off, and a message stating that the Turn Assist function
has been turned off will be displayed on the multi-information display for sev-
eral seconds.
■ Function limitations
Crawl Control
● In the following situations, brake control can be used to drive downhill at a
constant speed. However, engine control is not available when driving uphill
at a constant speed.
• When switched to second start mode.
● In the following situation, engine control and brake control will stop tempo-
rarily. In this event, the Crawl Control indicator will flash.
• When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).
Turn Assist function
In the following situations, the Turn Assist function will stop temporarily. In this
event, the Turn Assist indicator will flash.
● When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (10km/h).
● When the shift lever is moved to R.
■ When the Crawl Control system is operated continuously
● If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the buzzer will sound, a
malfunction notification will be displayed on the multi-information display,
the Crawl Control indicator will go off, and Crawl Control will be temporarily
inoperable as a result of the brake system overheating. In this event, stop
the vehicle immediately in a safe place, and allow the brake system to cool
down sufficiently until the TRAC OFF indicator goes off. (In the meantime,
normal driving is possible.)
● If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the buzzer will sound,
the system will be temporarily canceled, and a malfunction notification will
be displayed on the multi-information display as a result of the automatic
transmission system overheating. Stop the vehicle in a safe place until the
display goes off.
294
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ When depressing the accelerator pedal while the Crawl Control is oper-
ating
Multi-terrain Select operates in AUTO mode. (→P. 296)
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the Crawl Control system
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate
that a malfunction has occurred in Crawl Control system.
● Either of the following conditions may occur when the Crawl Control system
is operating. None of these are indicators that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on. (→P. 518, 527)
WARNING
■ When using Crawl Control
Do not rely solely on the Crawl Control. This function does not extend the
vehicle’s performance limitations. Always thoroughly check the road condi-
tions, and drive safely.
■ These conditions may cause the system not to operate properly
When driving on the following surfaces, the system may not be able to
maintain a fixed low speed, which may result in an accident:
● Extremely steep inclines.
● Extremely uneven surfaces.
● Snow-covered roads, or other slippery surfaces.
NOTICE
■ When using Turn Assist function
The Turn Assist function is a function to assist turning performance when
driving off road. The function may be less effective on paved road surfaces.
295
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Multi-terrain Select
Multi-terrain Select mode select
switch
Multi-terrain Select indicator
Multi-terrain Select indicator
comes on when operating.
Multi-information display
Displays status information
including operating status and
road type selection.
Multi-terrain Select is a system that helps drivability in off-road
situations.
When the Crawl Control is turned off
Select a mode that most closely matches the type of terrain on
which you are driving from among 5 modes.
Brake control can be optimized in accordance with the selected
mode.
When the Crawl Control is turned on
A mode which matches the road conditions is automatically selected
by depressing the accelerator pedal (AUTO mode).
Multi-terrain Select switch/indicators
1
2
3
296
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
When the Crawl Control is turned
off, a mode which matches the
road conditions can be selected
from among the following 5
modes.
MUD & SAND
LOOSE ROCK
MOGUL
ROCK & DIRT
ROCK
When the Crawl Control is turned on, the most suitable mode is auto-
matically selected according to the Crawl Control mode selected.
When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the Multi-terrain
Select indicator will come on, the mode select screen will be displayed
on the multi-information display, and Multi-terrain Select control will
begin.
● The four-wheel drive control switch is in “L4”.
● Both Active TRAC and VSC are not off.
Selectable modes
1
2
3
4
5
Mode Road Conditions
MUD & SAND
Suitable for muddy roads, sandy roads, snow-cov-
ered roads, dirt trails and other slippery or dirty con-
ditions
LOOSE ROCK
Suitable for slippery conditions consisting of mix-
tures of earth and loose rock
MOGUL
Suitable for a wide range of off-road conditions, par-
ticularly very bumpy conditions
ROCK & DIRT
Suitable for very bumpy road conditions, such as
mogul or rocky roads.
ROCK Suitable for rocky terrain
Multi-terrain Select control starting conditions
1
2
3
4
5
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
297
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Operate the Multi-terrain Select
mode select switch during Multi-
terrain Select control to select a
mode.
Once the mode is confirmed, the
mode name will be displayed and
the control will switch.
■ Automatic system cancelation
In the following situations, the Multi-terrain Select indicator will go off, and
Multi-terrain Select will be canceled automatically
● When the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4.
● When Active TRAC and VSC are off.
■ When it is difficult to generate traction
MUD & SAND mode provides the largest amount of tire slippage, followed by
LOOSE ROCK, MOGUL, ROCK & DIRT and ROCK mode.
Drivability can be improved by selecting a mode which provides a smaller
amount of tire slippage than the current mode when the amount of tire slip-
page is large, or conversely selecting a mode which provides a larger amount
of tire slippage than the current mode when the amount of tire slippage is
small.
■ When the vehicle is stuck
Switching the transfer and differential
For the operation of the following functions, refer to the following pages.
● Four-wheel drive system (→P. 286)
● Center differential lock (→P. 287)
Switching modes
298
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ When the brake system operates continuously
The brake system may overheat. In this case, a buzzer will sound, the TRAC
OFF indicator will flash, and Multi-terrain Select will be temporarily inopera-
ble. In this event, stop the vehicle immediately in a safe place, and allow the
brake system to cool down sufficiently. (There is no problem with continuing
normal driving.)
After a short time, the TRAC OFF indicator will go off, and you will be able to
use Multi-terrain Select.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
The slip indicator light will come on. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
WARNING
■ When using the Multi-terrain Select
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in
death or serious injuries:
● There is a chance that the selected mode may not be the most appropriate
in terms of road conditions such as pitch, slipperiness, undulation, etc.
(→P. 296)
● Multi-terrain Select is not intended to expand the limits of the vehicle.
Check the road conditions thoroughly beforehand, and drive safely and
carefully.
NOTICE
■ Precaution for use
The Multi-terrain Select is intended for use during off-road driving. Do not
use the system at any other time.
299
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Multi-terrain Monitor
The following screens can be selected according to driving conditions.
• Screens that can be selected vary depending on conditions such as
shift position and vehicle speed. (→P. 305)
• Depending on the displayed screen, the display can be switched
from normal to wide view display.
The Multi-terrain Monitor helps the driver to check the vehicle
surroundings. It assists in determining the conditions around
the driver in a variety of situations, such as when judging condi-
tions during off-road driving or checking for obstacles when
parking.
WARNING
■ When using the Multi-terrain Monitor system
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in
death or serious injuries.
● Never rely solely on the Multi-terrain Monitor. As with unequipped vehi-
cles, drive carefully while directly confirming the safety of your surround-
ings and the area to the rear of the vehicle. Take particular care to avoid
parked cars and other obstacles.
● Due to the characteristics of the camera lens, the actual position and dis-
tance of people and other obstacles will differ from those shown on the
Multi-terrain Monitor screen. Directly confirm the safety of your surround-
ings before driving.
● Do not drive while only looking at the screen. When driving, make sure to
directly confirm the safety of your surroundings, such as by visually check-
ing the area and using the vehicle’s mirrors.
● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the images may become
faint.
Images of moving objects in particular may distort or disappear from the
screen. Therefore, make sure to drive carefully while directly visually con-
firming the safety of your surroundings.
Multi-terrain Monitor screens
300
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4
● When checking the area to the front and sides of the vehicle
● When checking the condition of the road surface under the vehi-
cle
Front view & dual side view Front view & dual side view
(front magnified)
→P. 308 →P. 308
Under vehicle terrain view &
dual side view
Under vehicle terrain view &
dual side view (front magni-
fied)
→P. 312 →P. 312
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
301
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
● When checking the area to the rear of the vehicle
■ Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4
● When checking the area to the front of the vehicle (panoramic
view & wide front view)
→P. 316
● When checking the area to the sides of the vehicle (side views)
→P. 318
Rear view & dual side view Wide rear view
→P. 314 →P. 314
302
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● When checking the area to the rear of the vehicle
● When checking the area to the sides, front and rear of the vehicle
(with outside rear view mirrors retracted)
Panoramic view & rear view Wide rear view
→P. 321 →P. 321
Wide front view & side view Rear view & side view
→P. 327 →P. 327
Side views
→P. 327
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
303
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Displaying the Multi-terrain Monitor screen
The Multi-terrain Monitor screen will be displayed when the VIEW
switch is pressed while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
When the vehicle speed exceeds a certain value, the display returns to
the navigation or information display screen.
The amount of time that the Multi-terrain Monitor is displayed differs
depending on conditions such as the vehicle speed. (→P. 308)
VIEW switch
Display
Using the Multi-terrain Monitor screen
1
2
304
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Switch operations
On some screens, the display mode or display settings can be
changed using the switches.
● Automatic display mode switch
When automatic display mode is turned on, the Multi-terrain
Monitor screen is displayed in the following conditions, even if
the VIEW switch has not been operated.
• The shift lever is shifted to D or N
• While driving, the vehicle speed drops to approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or less (except when the shift lever is in R)
The automatic display mode
switches between on and off
each time is
selected.
When automatic display
mode is on, an indicator illu-
minates on the icon.
Even when automatic display
mode is on, the display can
still be switched by pressing
the VIEW switch.
● Display selection switches
The following switches can be pressed or selected to switch the
Multi-terrain Monitor display screen and to switch from normal to
wide view display.
Indicator
Switch Switch Function
VIEW switch Changing a display (→P. 305)
Angle mode
selection switch
Switches between the wide rear view
and rear view display (→P. 314, 321)
Under vehicle
terrain view
selection switch
Switches between the front view and
under vehicle terrain view
(→P. 308, 312)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
305
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
The screen display can be switched by operating the switches as fol-
lows while the Multi-terrain Monitor screen is displayed. (Screens that
can be displayed will vary depending on the positions of the shift lever
and four-wheel drive control switch)
■ Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4
:Press
: Select
: Select
: Operate the shift lever
Changing the Multi-terrain Monitor screen
306
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
*: The screen display can be switched by touching the image from the cam-
era on the screen.
*
*
*
Front view & dual side view
(front magnified): →P. 308
Under vehicle terrain view &
dual side view (front magnified):
→P. 312
Front view & dual side view:
→P. 308
Under vehicle terrain view &
dual side view: →P. 312
Rear view & dual side view:
→P. 314
Wide rear view: →P. 314
1
2
3
4
5
6
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
307
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4
:Press
: Select
: Operate the shift lever
*
1
: The displayed screen differs when the outside rear view mirrors are
retracted.
*
2
: The screen display can be switched by touching the image from the cam-
era on the screen.
*
1
*
2
*
1
Navigation screen, information
settings screen, etc.
Side views: →P. 318
Panoramic view & wide front
view: →P. 316
Panoramic view & rear view:
→P. 321
Wide rear view: →P. 321
1
2
3
4
5
308
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Multi-terrain Monitor screen display
The amount of time that the Multi-terrain Monitor screen is displayed changes
as follows according to the vehicle speed at the time the VIEW switch was
pressed.
The Multi-terrain Monitor screen is displayed if the vehicle speed is approxi-
mately 7 mph (12 km/h) or less when the VIEW switch is pressed.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 7 mph (12 km/h), the Multi-terrain
Monitor display is canceled.
The various screens of the Multi-terrain Monitor display information to
support several different driving situations, such as when checking for
obstacles when moving forward or in reverse, or when judging road
surface conditions during off-road driving.
■ Front view & dual side view
Front view & dual side view can be used to check the area around
the front of the vehicle.
• In addition to an image of the front of the vehicle, guide lines are
displayed in a composite view to provide reference for when
deciding a direction to move forward in.
• If the VIEW switch is pressed while the screen is displayed, the
screen switches from normal to magnified display. (Pressing the
switch again returns the screen to the normal display)
• If the steering wheel is turned 270° or more, guide lines and
other features to support turning are automatically displayed.
Screen display and functions
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
309
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
● Screen description
Under vehicle terrain view
selection switch
Switches between front view and
under vehicle terrain view display
each time the switch is selected.
Automatic display mode selec-
tion switch
→P. 304
Tilt meter/slip display
Displays the vehicle’s estimated
degree of incline or indicates a tire
slippage. (→P. 310)
Vehicle width lines (blue)
Indicate the width of the vehicle
including the outside rear view mir-
ror.
1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide
line (red)
3 ft. (1 m) distance guide line
(blue)
6 ft. (2 m) distance guide line
(blue)
Items to indicate the esti-
mated distance from the front end
of the vehicle.
Front tire course line (yellow)
Indicates the estimated course of
the front tires according to steer-
ing wheel position.
Forward movement guide line
(blue)
Indicates the estimated tire
course of the tightest possible
turn.
Front tire contact line (blue)
Rear tire contact line (blue)
Items and indicate esti-
mated tire positions on the image.
Rear tire course line (yellow)
Indicates the estimated course of
the rear tires.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5 7
8
9
10
11
10
11
12
310
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Front view rotating display function
This function operates when the four-wheel drive control switch
is in L4.
The front view image is automatically adjusted to be parallel and
assist the driver to check road surface conditions regardless of
the vehicle inclination.
● Tilt meter
Tilt meter displays the vehi-
cle inclination to the front,
rear, left and right within a
range of 0° to approximately
30°.
Degree markers of incline
to the front and rear
Indicates the vehicle inclina-
tion in degrees in the front
and rear directions.
Degree markers of incline to the left and right
Indicates the vehicle inclination in degrees in the left and right direc-
tions.
Pointer
Indicates the degree of the vehicle inclination in comparison to a par-
allel line.
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
311
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
● Slip display
When tire slippage is
detected, the tilt meter dis-
play area is automatically
switched to the slip display.
Tire display
Indicates the position of freely
spinning tires in yellow if the
tire spins. (During Crawl Con-
trol is operating, all of the
tires are indicated in yellow.)
Pop-up display of the intuitive parking assist
Displayed if an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist
is turned on.
Pop-up display of the RCTA
Displayed if a vehicle approaching from right or left rear of the vehicle
is detected while the RCTA is turned on.
■ Front view & dual side view display
The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in P, D or N.
■ Front view rotating display function
● The vehicle inclination displayed on the screen may differ from the actual
state.
● When the rotated screen is displayed, the corners of the front bumper may
not be seen on the screen.
■ Tilt meter display
● The display indicates the incline of the vehicle in degrees shown by the
movement of the pointer and the rotation of the vehicle image.
● The color of the degree markers of incline to the front, rear, left and right
changes according to the current incline of the vehicle.
● After the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the degree of
incline is not displayed until such information is determined.
● The degree of incline showed on the tilt meter is only an approximate indica-
tion, and may differ from the degree of incline measured using other equip-
ment.
■ Tilt meter/slip display
When the intuitive parking assist or RCTA detects an obstacle or another
vehicle, a warning message pops up in the tilt meter/slip display area.
1
2
3
312
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view
Lines indicating current vehicle and tire position are displayed in a
composite view on an image taken approximately 10 ft. (3 m)
behind the current vehicle position and assists the driver to check
conditions underneath the vehicle or determine the position of the
front tires.
Current vehicle position
Image displayed in the under vehicle terrain view (image taken
approximately 10 ft. (3 m) behind the current vehicle position)
Vehicle position at the time the image was taken (approximately
10 ft. (3 m) behind the current vehicle position)
● Displaying the under vehicle terrain view
While the front view is displayed, stop the vehicle completely,
and then press .
Pressing again returns the screen to the front view dis-
play.
● Screen description
Tire position indicator lines
(black)
Indicates the estimated posi-
tion of the front tires.
Vehicle position indicator
lines (blue)
Indicates the estimated posi-
tion of the vehicle.
Icon (flashing)
Indicates that the under vehicle terrain view display is of an image
taken in the past.
1
2
3
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
313
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view
● The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in D or N.
● While the under vehicle terrain view is displayed, if the vehicle speed
reaches or exceeds approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), the screen automatically
returns to the front view display.
● In the following situations, the under vehicle terrain view selection switch
cannot be operated.
• The vehicle is not completely stopped
• After the engine starts, a fixed distance or more has not been driven
• After the four-wheel drive control switch is shifted to L4, a fixed distance
or more has not been driven
● In the following situations, the system may not operate normally, or it may
not be possible to switch to the under vehicle terrain view.
• The road is covered with snow
• It is nighttime and the road has no illumination
• Dirt or foreign matter is adhering to the camera lens
• There is water in front of the vehicle (a river, puddle, sea water, etc.)
WARNING
■ Guide lines
The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ
from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers,
cargo weight, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the sur-
rounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while confirming the
safety of your surroundings.
■ Under vehicle terrain view display
The image displayed is one that was previously taken at a point approxi-
mately 10 ft. (3 m) behind the current vehicle position. In cases such as
when objects move after the image is taken, the image displayed on the
screen may differ from the actual state.
314
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Rear view & dual side view/wide rear view
Guide lines are displayed in a composite view on an image of the
area to the rear of the vehicle to use as a reference when deciding
a course of movement and assist the driver to check the safety of
the area to the rear of the vehicle or to park the vehicle.
● Screen description
The following 2 types of display mode can be selected according
to conditions.
Angle selection switch
Switches between rear view & dual side view display and wide rear view
display each time the switch is selected.
Tilt meter/slip display
→P. 310
Projected course lines (yellow)
Indicate the estimated course of the vehicle according to steering opera-
tions.
1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide line (red)
3 ft. (1 m) distance guide line (yellow)
8 ft. (2.5 m) distance guide line (yellow)
, and indicate the estimated distance from the rear end of the vehi-
cle.
Rear view & dual side view dis-
play
Wide rear view display
1
2
3
4
5
6
4 5 6
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
315
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Vehicle width extension guide line (blue)
Indicates the estimated vehicle width including the outside rear view mir-
rors.
Front tire contact line (blue)
Rear tire contact line (blue)
Items and indicate estimated tire positions on the image.
■ Rear view & dual side view/wide rear view
The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in R.
■ Guide lines
If the back door is not closed, guide lines will not be displayed. If the guide
lines do not display even when the back door is closed, have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
■ Intuitive parking assist pop-up display
→P. 278
WARNING
■ Guide lines
The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ
from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers,
cargo weight, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the sur-
rounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while confirming the
safety of your surroundings.
7
8
9
8 9
316
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Panoramic view & wide front view
The image looking down at the vehicle from above and the image
from the front camera are displayed simultaneously and assist the
driver to check conditions in front, and to the right and left, of the
vehicle at intersections or T-junctions with poor visibility.
● Screen description
The following 2 types of display mode can be selected according
to conditions.
Panoramic view
Displays an image looking down at the vehicle from above.
Wide front view
Displays an image of the area to the front of the vehicle.
Display area
Guide line display selection switch
→P. 317
Automatic display mode selection switch
→P. 304
Front distance guide line (blue)
Indicates a distance approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the front end of the
vehicle.
Forward projected course lines
Automatically displayed when the steering wheel is turned 90° or more
from the center position.
Indicates the estimated course of the vehicle according to steering wheel
operations.
Distance guide line display
mode
Projected course line display
mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
317
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
● Switching to automatic display mode
→P. 304
● Switching guide line display modes
The mode switches and the switch display changes each time
the guide line display selection switch is selected.
■ Panoramic view & wide front view
The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in P, D or N.
■ Intuitive parking assist pop-up display
→P. 278
Selected mode
Distance guide line
display mode
Projected course line
display mode
Switch display
WARNING
■ Guide lines
The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ
from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers,
cargo weight, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the sur-
rounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while confirming the
safety of your surroundings.
318
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Side views
The image from the both side cameras is displayed and assists the
driver to check conditions on the sides of the vehicle or to confirm
the safety of narrow roads.
● Screen description
Side view (left front side)
Side view (right front side)
Display area
Vehicle width lines (blue)
Indicate the estimated vehicle
width including the outside
rear view mirrors.
Front distance guide line
(red)
Indicates a distance approxi-
mately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the
front end of the vehicle.
Front tire contact line (blue)
Indicates the estimated front tire position on the image.
Automatic display mode selection switch
→P. 304
Intuitive parking assist
When the intuitive parking assist is on, an icon will pop up when an
obstacle is detected. (Refer to P. 278 for information about the intui-
tive parking assist.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
319
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
● Using the vehicle width lines
The relative distance of obstacles from the vehicle width lines
can be confirmed.
Example 1: When there is an obstacle in front of the vehicle
Operate the steering wheel so that the vehicle width
line and the obstacle do not overlap.
Example 2: When parking on the shoulder
Approach the shoulder, but do not allow the vehicle
width line to overlap the curb or other obstacles.
After confirming the distance to the shoulder of the
road, maneuvering the vehicle so that the vehicle
width line and the curb or other obstacle are parallel
allows the vehicle to be parked evenly.
320
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Side views
● The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in P, D or N.
● When the outside rear view mirrors are retracted, the displayed area
changes (the area on the screen that is not masked in black). (→P. 327)
■ Intuitive parking assist pop-up display
→P. 278
WARNING
■ Guide lines
The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ
from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers,
cargo weight, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the sur-
rounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while confirming the
safety of your surroundings.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
321
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Panoramic view & rear view/wide rear view
• Panoramic view & rear view:
The image looking down at the vehicle from above and the image
from the rear camera are displayed simultaneously and assist
the driver to check the safety of the area when parking.
• Wide rear view:
The image from the rear camera is displayed in a range of
approximately 180° and assists the driver to check the safety of
the area when backing up.
● Screen description
Guide line selection switch
→P. 317
Angle mode selection switch
Switches between the panoramic view & rear view and wide rear view dis-
play each time the switch is selected.
Panoramic view & rear view
Rear view
Switches the screen to wide rear view display when you touch the display.
Wide rear view
Switches the screen to the panoramic & rear view display when you touch
the display.
Intuitive parking assist
When the intuitive parking assist is turned on, an icon will pop up when an
obstacle is detected. (Refer to P. 278 for information about the intuitive
parking assist.)
Panoramic view & rear view
display
Wide rear view display
1
2
3
4
5
6
322
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Switching modes
The display mode switches and the icon display changes each
time the guide line display selection switch is selected.
• Projected course line display mode:
Projected course lines that change according to steering
wheel operations are displayed.
• Parking assist guide line display mode:
Inverted steering wheel operations (parking assist guide line)
are displayed. Use this mode if you are used to how the vehi-
cle handles (if you can park without needing the course line
display).
• Distance guide line display mode:
Only distance guide lines are displayed.
● Guide lines
The panoramic view & rear view screen is explained here as an
example.
Selected mode
Projected course
line display mode
Parking assist
guide line display
mode
Distance guide
line display mode
Icon display
Projected course line display
mode
Parking assist guide line dis-
play mode
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
323
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Front distance guide line (blue)
Indicates a distance approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the front end of the
vehicle.
Rear vehicle width extension guide lines
Indicate the estimated course of the vehicle when backing up straight.
• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
• In projected course line display mode, this item overlaps the projected
course lines when going straight.
Side projected course line (yellow)
Indicates the projected reverse course calculated by the angle of the steer-
ing wheel.
The projected reverse course line on the outside of the turn is displayed
according to the direction of the steering wheel.
Rear distance guide line
Indicates the estimated distance from the end of the rear bumper (at the
center). (Red line: approximately 1.5 ft. [0.5 m] away. Yellow line: approxi-
mately 3 ft. [1 m] away.)
In projected course line display mode, the rear distance guide line changes
according to steering wheel operations.
Projected reverse course line (yellow)
Changes according to steering wheel operations and indicates the esti-
mated course of the vehicle.
Rear distance guide line (blue)
Indicates a distance approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the end of the rear
bumper (at the center).
Parking assist guide line (blue)
Indicates the estimated tire course of the tightest possible turn in reverse.
Distance guide line display
mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
324
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Intuitive parking assist
When the intuitive parking assist is on, an icon will be displayed when an
obstacle is detected. (Refer to P. 278 for information about the intuitive
parking assist.)
Vehicle center line (blue)
Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
● Parking operation (using the estimated course line)
When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the
space described in the procedure below, the steering directions will
be reversed.
Shift the shift lever to the R position.
Turn the steering wheel so that
the estimated course lines are
within the parking space, and
back up slowly.
Parking space
Estimated course lines
8
9
1
2
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
325
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
When the rear position of the
vehicle has entered the parking
space, turn the steering wheel
so that the vehicle width exten-
sion guide lines are within the
left and right dividing lines of
the parking space.
Vehicle width extension
guide line
Once the vehicle width extension guide lines and the parking space
lines are parallel, straighten the steering wheel and back up slowly
until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.
● Parking (using the parking assist guide line)
Shift the shift lever to the R position.
Back up until the parking assist
guide line meets the edge of
the left-hand dividing line of the
parking space.
Parking assist guide line
Parking space dividing line
3
3
4
5
1
2
1
2
326
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and back up slowly.
Once the vehicle is parallel with the parking space, straighten the
steering wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely
entered the parking space.
Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.
■ Panoramic view & rear view/wide rear view
The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in R.
■ Guide lines
If the back door is not closed, guide lines will not be displayed. If the guide
lines do not display even when the back door is closed, have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
■ Intuitive parking assist pop-up display
→P. 278
WARNING
■ Guide lines
The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ
from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers,
cargo weight, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the sur-
rounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while confirming the
safety of your surroundings.
■ When using panoramic view & rear view or wide rear view
● If the vehicle width extension guide lines and projected course lines are
not aligned with the steering wheel in the center position, drive straight on
a road without as little traffic and as few bends or curves as possible for
approximately 5 minutes or more. If the symptom is not resolved, have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● Rear vehicle width extension guide lines are displayed wider than the
actual vehicle width. When backing up, always confirm the safety of your
surroundings and the area to the rear of the vehicle.
3
4
5
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
327
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Display when the outside rear view mirrors are retracted (side
view and side views)
When the outside rear view mirrors are retracted, one of the follow-
ing screens is displayed and assists the driver to confirm the safety
of the area around the vehicle, or park alongside and close to
another object.
● Screen description
When the wide front view is dis-
played
When the rear view is dis-
played
When the side views is dis-
played
328
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
For information about other than the side view and side views display
area, refer to the page for the respective screen.
Front distance guide line (red)
Indicates a distance approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the front end of the
vehicle.
Front tire contact line (blue)
Indicates the estimated front tire position on the image.
Vehicle width lines (blue)
Indicate the estimated vehicle width including the outside rear view mir-
rors.
Rear tire contact line (blue)
Indicates the estimated rear tire position on the image.
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
329
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
● Using the vehicle width lines
The relative distance of obstacles from the vehicle width lines
can be confirmed.
• Approach the shoulder, but do not allow the vehicle width line
to overlap the curb or other obstacles.
• After confirming the distance to the shoulder, maneuvering the
vehicle so that the vehicle width line and the curb or other
obstacle are parallel allows the vehicle to be parked evenly.
■ Intuitive parking assist pop-up display
→P. 278
WARNING
■ Guide lines
The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ
from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers,
cargo weight, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the sur-
rounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while confirming the
safety of your surroundings.
330
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Intuitive parking assist and RCTA cooperative display
When either the Intuitive parking assist (→P. 278) or Blind Spot
Monitor (→P. 349) is turned on, a popup icon warns the driver when
an obstacle is detected.
Example of pop-up display in the panoramic view
Example of pop-up display in the wide rear view
Example of pop-up display in the side view (with mirrors retracted)
Example of pop-up display in the side views
Example of pop-up display in the front view & dual side view, under
vehicle terrain view & dual side view or rear view & dual side view
■ Intuitive parking assist pop-up display
While the intuitive parking assist is in use, a pop-up is displayed when an
obstacle is detected (→P. 278).
However, this function only informs the driver that an obstacle is close to the
vehicle and the detected obstacle is not displayed on the screen. Be sure to
visually confirm the safety of your surroundings.
1
2
3
4
5
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
331
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in an
unexpected accident. Also, when driving, make sure to directly con-
firm the safety of your surroundings and the area to the rear of the
vehicle.
When using the Multi-terrain Monitor
WARNING
■ Conditions under which the Multi-terrain Monitor should not be used
Do not use the Multi-terrain Monitor in the following situations. The system
may not operate properly, resulting in an unexpected accident.
● When driving on an icy, snow-covered or otherwise slippery road surface
● When using tire chains or a spare tire
● When either front door or the back door is not completely closed
● When driving on an uneven road, such as a hill
● When tires or suspension parts other than those specified are equipped
When the tires are replaced, the position indicated by the guide lines dis-
played on the screen may differ.
■ Guide lines
The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ
from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers,
cargo weight, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the sur-
rounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while confirming the
safety of your surroundings.
332
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
■ Panoramic view
● In the panoramic view, the system combines images taken from the front,
back, left and right side cameras into a single image. There are limits to
the range and content that can be displayed. Understand the characteris-
tics of this system before using.
● Image clarity may decline at the four corners of the panoramic view. How-
ever, this is not a malfunction, as these are the regions along the border of
each camera image where the images are combined.
● Depending on lighting conditions near each of the cameras, bright and
dark patches may appear on the panoramic view.
● The panoramic view display does not extend higher than the installation
position and image capture range of each camera.
● There are blind spots around the vehicle and there are regions that are not
displayed in the panoramic view.
● Three-dimensional objects displayed in wide front view or rear view may
not be displayed in the panoramic view.
● People and other three-dimensional obstacles may appear differently
when displayed in the panoramic view. (These differences include, among
others, cases in which displayed objects appear to have fallen over, disap-
pear near image processing areas, appear from image processing areas,
or when the actual distance to an object differs from the displayed posi-
tion.)
● The panoramic view will not be properly displayed when either front door
or the back door is open.
● The vehicle icon displayed in the panoramic view is a computer generated
image, and properties such as the color, shape and size will differ from the
actual vehicle. Therefore, nearby three-dimensional objects may appear to
be touching the vehicle, and actual distances to three-dimensional objects
may differ from those displayed.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
333
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Display range
● Panoramic view
Not displayed.
Not displayed. (Displayed in black around the vehicle icon.)
● Wide front view
Masking
Parts of the vehicle (such as the bumper or grille) are displayed on
the screen.
Camera visibility range
Object detectable by camera
Object not detectable by camera
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
336
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Panoramic view display range
● In the panoramic view, the system processes and displays images acquired
form the 4 cameras under the assumption that the vehicle is on a flat road
surface. Therefore, the display may appear as follows.
• Three-dimensional objects may appear to have fallen over, and be long
and thin or bigger than they actually are
• Three-dimensional objects at a point higher than the surface of the road
may appear further away than they actually are, or may not appear
• Tall objects may appear to emerge from the image processing seams
● Inconsistencies in the brightness of images from each camera may occur
depending on lighting conditions.
● The displayed image may not be aligned when the tilt or height of the vehi-
cle changed due to the number of passengers, cargo weight or remaining
quantity of gasoline.
● Images and guide lines may not be properly displayed when the doors are
not completely closed.
● The relative distances between the vehicle icon and road surface or an
obstacle displayed in the panoramic view may differ from the actual state.
● If an illuminated license plate is used, it may appear on the screen.
● The black area around the vehicle icon is an area that is not appear in the
camera. Check these areas directly.
■ Wide front view display range
● Certain areas at the front of the vehicle have a different sense of distance,
and are masked in black so that they do not appear on the screen.
● There are limits to the range displayed on the screen. Objects at either cor-
ner of the bumper or directly below the bumper are not displayed.
● The perceived distance in images displayed on the screen differs from the
actual distance.
■ Images displayed on the screen
Cameras of the Multi-terrain Monitor system use special lenses. The distance
of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.
● The circled areas shown in the illustra-
tion may be difficult to see, as these are
points where images are combined.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
337
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Multi-terrain Monitor cameras
● Camera positions
The cameras of the Multi-terrain Monitor system are installed as
follows.
Side camera (left and right
sides)
Front camera
Rear camera
● Using the cameras
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.)
is adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In
this case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the cam-
era lens with a soft and wet cloth.
1
2
3
338
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
■ How to use the cameras
● Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the Multi-
terrain Monitor from operating properly.
• Do not strike the camera area, or allow any objects to bump into it
If the camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact, the
camera position, installation angle, etc., may deviate. If the camera is
accidentally subjected to an impact, have the vehicle inspected at your
Toyota dealer.
• Do not remove, disassemble or modify the camera or surrounding parts
Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning. This also may result
in a loss of waterproof performance.
• If the camera lens is dirty, follow the above procedures to clean it
If the camera lens is damaged it cannot transmit a clear image.
Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, oil film remover, glass coating,
etc. to contact the camera cover
Doing so will negatively affect the camera cover (resin). If this happens,
wipe it off immediately.
• When the outside temperature is cold, do not cause any sudden
changes in temperature, such as by applying hot water
● When washing the vehicle, do not apply water with a high-pressure
washer to the camera or surrounding area. Doing so may cause the cam-
era to receive a strong impact, and the camera may not operate properly
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
339
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Differences between the panoramic view screen and the actual
road
The distance guide lines, the combined panoramic view image,
guide lines, etc., indicate estimated distances on a flat road sur-
face. In the following situations, actual distances and vehicle course
will differ from the guide lines on the screen.
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply
The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle
than the actual distance. Therefore, obstacles on an upward
slope appear further away than they actually are. In the same
way, the actual course of the vehicle will differ from the course
indicated by the guide lines.
340
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply
The distance guide lines are displayed further away than the
actual distance. Therefore, obstacles on a downward slope
appear closer than the actually are. In the same way, the actual
course of the vehicle will differ from the course indicated by the
guide lines.
● When the vehicle is tilted
When the vehicle is tilted due to the number of passengers or
weight of the load, actual distances and vehicle course will differ.
Margin of error
1
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
341
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Differences between the panoramic view display and actual
three-dimensional objects
Be aware of the following points when three-dimensional objects
higher than the surface of the road (such as a vehicle bumper) are
nearby.
● Panoramic view display
In the panoramic view, the system processes and displays
images under the assumption that the vehicle is on a flat road
surface. Therefore, the position of three-dimensional objects
higher than the road surface (such as a vehicle bumper) cannot
be determined. Even if it seems that a collision will not occur
according to the screen, there may not actually be any extra
space between the vehicle and an obstacle higher than the road
surface, resulting in a collision. In these cases, confirm the safety
of your surroundings directly.
WARNING
■ Intuitive parking assist pop-up display
When the intuitive parking assist pop-up display is red, park the vehicle and
make sure to confirm the safety of your surroundings.
Failure to do so may lead to an unexpected accident.
342
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Projected course lines
Projected course lines are displayed under the assumption that
the vehicle is on a flat road surface. Therefore, the position of
three-dimensional objects higher than the road surface (such as
a vehicle bumper) cannot be determined. Even if it seems that an
obstacle is outside of the projected course lines and a collision
will not occur according to the screen, an obstacle may actually
be in the vehicle course, resulting in a collision.
Projected course lines
Three-dimensional objects in high positions (such as walls with
protrusions or the loading areas of trucks) may not be displayed
on the screen. Confirm the safety of your surroundings directly.
Protrusion of a wall
1
1
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
343
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Differences between the rear view or wide rear view and actual
roads
The guide lines on the screen are intended for flat surfaces (such
as the road). Be aware of the following points when three-dimen-
sional objects with protrusions (obstacles such as the cargo bed of
a truck) are nearby.
● Projected course lines
Guide lines are displayed in reference to a level road surface and
cannot be used to determine the location of three-dimensional
objects. Confirm the safety of your surroundings directly. Even if
it seems that the cargo bed of a truck is outside the projected
course lines and a collision will not occur according to the
screen, it may actually be in the vehicle course, resulting in a col-
lision.
Projected course lines
1
344
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Differences between the panoramic view, rear view and wide
rear view and actual roads
● Distance guide lines
Guide lines are displayed in reference to the road surface and
cannot be used to determine the distance of three-dimensional
objects from the vehicle. Confirm the safety of your surroundings
directly. On the screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point
according to the distance guide lines. However, in reality if
you back up to point , you will hit the truck. On the screen, it
appears that is closest and is farthest away. However, in
reality, the distance to and is same, and is farther than
and .
● Under vehicle terrain view
The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator
lines may differ from actual vehicle positions depending on the
number of passengers, weight of the load, road grade, road sur-
face conditions, brightness of the surrounding environment, etc.
Always drive the vehicle while directly confirming the safety of
your surroundings.
2
1
1 3
1 3 2
1 3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
345
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Using under vehicle terrain view
● The images displayed were previously taken approximately 10 ft. (3 m)
behind the current vehicle position.
Therefore, actual conditions may differ from those shown on the screen in
the following situations.
• An obstacle has appeared after the image was taken
• Loose material like sand or snow has crumbled or shifted
• An obstacle has moved
• There is a puddle, tract of mud, etc., within the display range
• The vehicle slips
● In the following situations, actual tire positions and vehicle position may dif-
fer from those indicated by the tire position indicator lines and vehicle posi-
tion indicator lines.
• Tires have been replaced
• Optional equipment has been installed
WARNING
■ Guide lines
The displayed guide lines are composed with the image that was previously
taken and may differ from the actual state. Always drive the vehicle while
confirming the safety of your surroundings.
346
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause
and the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to see
• The vehicle is in a dark area
• The temperature around the lens
is either high or low
• The outside temperature is low
• There are water droplets on the
camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is
adhering to the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are shining
directly into the camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent
lights, sodium lights, mercury
lights, etc.
Drive while visually checking the
vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the
Multi-terrain Monitor again once
conditions have been improved.)
The image on the rear view monitor
system screen can be adjusted,
refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adher-
ing to the camera
Flush the camera with a large quan-
tity of water and wipe the camera
lens with a soft and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding area has
received a strong impact
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
The guide lines are very far out of alignment
The camera position is out of align-
ment
Have the vehicle inspected at your
Toyota dealer.
• The vehicle is tilted (there is a
heavy load on the vehicle, tire
pressure is low due to a tire punc-
ture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an incline
If this happens due to these causes,
it does not indicate a malfunction.
Drive while visually checking the
vehicle’s surroundings.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
347
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
The projected course lines move even though the steering wheel is
straight (vehicle width extension guide lines and projected course lines
are not aligned)
There is a malfunction in the signals
being output by the steering sensor
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
Guide lines are not displayed
The back door is open
Close the back door.
If this does not resolve the symptom,
have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
“!” is displayed
There is a malfunction in the Multi-
terrain Monitor
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
The battery is disconnected and
reconnected
Turn the steering wheel fully to right
and left.
If this does not resolve the symptom,
have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
Likely cause Solution
348
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
■ How to use the camera
● The Multi-terrain Monitor system may not operate properly in the following
cases.
• If the front or the rear of the vehicle or the outside rear view mirror has
been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle may have changed.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassem-
ble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity
of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the cam-
era lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to
transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to
adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured
on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunc-
tioning.
• When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mer-
cury light etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
• The camera can be damaged by flying rocks and other debris.
● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunc-
tion. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
349
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
∗
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions;
● The BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) function
Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes
● The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function
Assists the driver when backing up
These functions use same sensors.
∗: If equipped
Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor
350
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Multi-information display
The BSM function/RCTA function can be turned on/off. (→P. 351)
The RCTA function is available when the BSM function is on.
Outside rear view mirror indicator
BSM function:
When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors
or approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot, the outside rear view
mirror indicator on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn signal lever
is operated toward the detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator
will flash.
RCTA function:
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is
detected, the outside rear view mirror indicators flash.
“BSM” indicator/“RCTA” indicator
When the BSM function/RCTA function is turned on, the indicator illumi-
nates
Monitor screen display (RCTA function only)
If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is
detected, the RCTA icon (→P. 358) for the detected side will be displayed
on the monitor screen. This illustration shows an example of a vehicle
approaching from the left at the rear of the vehicle.
RCTA buzzer (RCTA function only)
If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is
detected, a buzzer will sound. The buzzer also sounds for approximately 1
second immediately after the BSM function is operated to turn the system
on.
1
2
3
4
5
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
351
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Use the meter control switches to select on the multi-informa-
tion display.
Choose “BSM” using , and then press .
Choose “BSM” or “RCTA” using , and then press .
■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility
When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be dif-
ficult to see.
■ RCTA buzzer hearing
RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high audio vol-
ume.
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable” is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display
Water, snow, mud, etc., may be built up in the vicinity of the sensor area of
bumper. (→P. 352)
Removing the water, snow, mud, etc., from the vicinity of the sensor area of
bumper should return it to normal.
Also, the sensor may not function normally when used in extremely hot or cold
weather.
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor System Malfunction” is shown on the multi-
information display
There may be a sensor malfunction or voltage abnormality. Have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor
Turning the BSM function/RCTA function on/off
1
2
3
352
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Handling the radar sensor
One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of
the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the
Blind Spot Monitor can function correctly.
● Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper to a
strong impact.
If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction
and vehicles may not be detected correctly.
In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
• A sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact.
• If the surrounding area of a sensor is scratched or dented, or part of it
has become disconnected.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on
the bumper.
● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
● Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Toyota color.
● Keep the sensor and its surrounding area
on the bumper clean at all times.
If a sensor or its surrounding area on the
rear bumper is dirty or covered with snow,
the Blind Spot Monitor may not operate
and a warning message (→P. 351) will be
displayed. In this situation, clear off the
dirt or snow and drive the vehicle with the
operation conditions of the BSM function
(→P. 355) satisfied for approximately 10
minutes. If the warning message does not
disappear, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
353
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
The BSM function uses radar sensors to detect the following vehicles
traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of
such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors.
Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the out-
side rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are
not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
BSM function
1
2
354
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of each detection area is:
Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of
the vehicle
*
*
: The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side
of the vehicle cannot be detected.
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear bumper
*
*
: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected
vehicle is, the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the out-
side rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash.
BSM function detection areas
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the
driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the
Blind Spot Monitor function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change
lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore
the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
355
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ The BSM function is operational when
The BSM function is operational when all of the following conditions are met:
● The BSM function is on.
● The shift lever is in a position other than R.
● The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
■ The BSM function will detect a vehicle when
The BSM function will detect a vehicle present in the detection area in the fol-
lowing situations:
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the BSM function will not detect a vehicle
The BSM function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles
and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.
*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects
*
● Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your vehicle*
*
: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may
occur.
356
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Conditions under which the BSM function may not function correctly
● The BSM function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situa-
tions:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its
surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surround-
ing area on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad
weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between
each vehicle
• When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and
the vehicle that enters the detection area
• When the difference in speed between your vehicle and another vehicle
is changing
• When a vehicle enters a detection area traveling at about the same
speed as your vehicle
• As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehicle remains in the detection area
• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips
in the road, etc.
• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven
surfaces
• When vehicle lanes are wide, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and
the vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away from your vehicle
• When a bicycle carrier or other accessory is installed to the rear of the
vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and
the vehicle that enters the detection area
• Immediately after the BSM function is turned on
● Instances of the BSM function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or
object may increase in the following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its
surrounding area
• When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc. that
enters the detection area is short
• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips
in the road, etc.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when driving on the edge of a lane,
and a vehicle traveling in a lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the
detection area
• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven
surfaces
• When the tires are slipping or spinning
• When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short
• When a bicycle carrier or other accessory is installed to the rear of the
vehicle
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
357
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert functions when your vehicle is in reverse.
It can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of
the vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehi-
cle’s existence through flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators
and sounding a buzzer.
RCTA function
Approaching vehicles Detection areas
1 2
358
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ RCTA icon display
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the
vehicle is detected, the following will be displayed on the monitor
screen
Display Content
A vehicle is approaching from the left at the rear of
the vehicle
A vehicle is approaching from the right at the rear of
the vehicle
Vehicles are approaching from both sides of the
vehicle
The RCTA function is malfunctioning (→P. 351)
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the function
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
The RCTA function is only a supplementary function which alerts the driver
that a vehicle is approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.
As the RCTA function may not function correctly under certain conditions,
the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary. Over reliance on
this function may lead to an accident resulting death or serious injury.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
359
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert
for faster vehicles from farther away.
Example:
■ The RCTA function is operational when
● The RCTA function is on.
● The shift lever is in R.
● Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
● Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and
18 mph (28 km/h).
The RCTA function detection areas
Approaching vehicle Speed
Approximate
alert distance
Fast 18 mph (28 km/h) 65 ft. (20 m)
Slow 5 mph (8 km/h) 18 ft. (5.5 m)
1
360
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Conditions under which the RCTA function will not detect a vehicle
The RCTA function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles
and/or objects:
● Vehicles approaching from directly behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects
*
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*
● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle
*
*
: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may
occur.
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect
due to obstructions
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
361
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■ Conditions under which the RCTA function may not function correctly
● The RCTA function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situa-
tions:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its
surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surround-
ing area on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad
weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between
each vehicle
• When a vehicle is approaching at high speed
• Immediately after the RCTA function is turned on
• Immediately after the engine is started with the RCTA function on
• When backing up on a slope with a
sharp change in grade
• When backing out of a shallow angle
parking spot
• When the sensors cannot detect a
vehicle due to obstructions
362
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Instances of the RCTA function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or
object may increase in the following situations:
• When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle
• When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a
guardrail, wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves
toward the rear of the vehicle, is short
• When the parking space faces a
street and vehicles are being driven
on the street
363
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Driving assist systems
◆ Multi Terrain ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the
brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface, or in off-road
conditions (such as rough roads, sand and mud)
◆ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces
◆ Active TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the 4 wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads, or in off-road
conditions
◆ Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on
an incline or slippery slope
◆ KDSS (Kinetic Dynamic Suspension System)
KDSS helps to enhance ride comfort and handling response by using a
hydraulic control system to control the suspension stabilizer bars in
response to road surface and driving conditions during cornering or off-
road driving
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following
systems operate automatically in response to various driving
situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supple-
mentary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operat-
ing the vehicle.
364
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
◆ VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering)
Helps to adjust the wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle
speed and steering wheel movement.
◆ Trailer Sway Control
Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake pres-
sure for individual wheels and reducing engine torque when trailer sway is
detected.
Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if VSC
turned off or experiences a malfunction.
The slip indicator light flashes to
indicate that the VSC/Trailer
Sway Control/Active TRAC/hill-
start assist control systems have
been engaged.
The stop lights and high mounted
stoplight turn on when the hill-start
assist control system or Trailer
Sway Control is operating.
When the Active TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Control/hill-start assist
control systems are operating
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
365
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, Active TRAC may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn
the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
Quickly push and release the but-
ton to turn off Active TRAC.
The TRAC OFF indicator will come
on.
This mode can be used when the
transfer mode is H4.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
■ Turning off Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control
Push and hold the button for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is
stopped to turn off Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control.
The VSC OFF indicator light and TRAC OFF indicator will come on
*.
Push the button again to turn the system back on.
*: On vehicles with pre-collision system, pre-collision brake assist and pre-
collision braking will also be disabled. The PCS warning light will come on
and the message will be shown on the multi-information display. (→P. 241)
■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display show-
ing that TRAC has been disabled even if the VSC OFF switch has not
been pressed
Active TRAC, hill-start assist control, Crawl Control cannot be operated. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
Disabling the Active TRAC
366
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Automatic reactivation of Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control
Turning the engine switch off after turning off the Active TRAC and VSC sys-
tems will automatically re-enable them.
■ Automatic Active TRAC reactivation
If only the Active TRAC system is turned off, the Active TRAC system will turn
on when vehicle speed increases.
■ Automatic Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control reactivation
If the Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control are turned off, the systems
will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
■ If the brake system overheats
The brake system may overheat. In this case, a buzzer will sound, and the
TRAC OFF indicator will flash, and Active TRAC and hill-start assist control
will be temporarily inoperable. In this event, stop the vehicle immediately in a
safe place, and allow the brake system to cool down sufficiently until the
TRAC OFF indicator go off. (There is no problem with continuing normal driv-
ing.)
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the Multi Terrain ABS, brake assist,
Active TRAC, VSC, Trailer Sway Control, hill-start assist control and
VGRS
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate
that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the Multi Terrain ABS is acti-
vated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the Multi Terrain ABS is
activated.
■ Hill-start assist control is operational when
● The shift lever is in D or S.
● The brake pedal is not depressed.
■ VGRS is disabled in the following situations
● During stopping or the steering wheel has been moved for a long time while
driving at lower speeds.
● After the engine is restarted at less than -22°F (-30°C).
● If you disconnect the battery with the steering wheel turned, the center posi-
tion of the steering wheel could be slightly and temporary hanged. To initial-
ize the VGRS, drive for a short while.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
367
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
WARNING
Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause
death or serious injury:
■ The Multi Terrain ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as
excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick
road.
■ Stopping distance when the Multi Terrain ABS is operating may exceed
that of normal conditions
The Multi Terrain ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping dis-
tance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you,
especially in the following situations.
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads
■ Active TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the Active TRAC is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ If the hill-start assist control does not operate effectively
Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control
may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice.
■ When Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As there are systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force,
do not turn off Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control unless neces-
sary.
368
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ When the VSC and Trailer Sway Control are activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes.
■
Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to
the specified tire pressure level.
The Multi Terrain ABS, Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control will
not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires
or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will
affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunc-
tion.
■ Trailer Sway Control precaution
The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situ-
ations. Depending on many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle,
trailer, road surface, and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control sys-
tem may not be effective. Refer to your trailer owner’s manual for informa-
tion on how to tow your trailer properly.
■ If trailer sway occurs
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
● Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle
and trailer should stabilize. (→P. 195)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
369
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
NOTICE
■ KDSS
In the following situations, there is the possibility that a system malfunction
has occurred, and drive comfort and the vehicle’s ability to travel on poor
road surfaces may be reduced. Take the vehicle to your Toyota dealer
immediately.
● When turning a corner, the vehicle’s body seems to roll further than nor-
mal.
● If after the vehicle has been left in a slanted position for a long time, for
example with the wheels of one side parked on a curb, the vehicle does
not return to level when driving (the vehicle remains slanted to one side
after returning the vehicle to level ground).
370
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-6. Driving tips
Off-road precautions
● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this
type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
● An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road allowing you to anticipate problems.
● It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary pas-
senger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause the vehicle to rollover.
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has
higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the
height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in
a wide variety of off-road applications.
Off-road vehicle features
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
371
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
WARNING
■ Off-road vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, seri-
ous injury or damage to your vehicle:
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers
should always fasten their seat belts.
● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.
● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehi-
cle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher
center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordi-
nary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or
straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle)
can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.
372
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-6. Driving tips
When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following pre-
cautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the clo-
sure of areas to off-road vehicles:
● Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permit-
ted to travel.
● Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering
private property.
● Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs
that restrict travel.
● Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving tech-
niques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to
roads.
■ Additional information for off-road driving
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road,
consult the following organizations:
● State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
● State Motor Vehicle Bureau
● Recreational Vehicle Clubs
● U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
Off-road driving
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
373
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
WARNING
■ Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, seri-
ous injury or damage to your vehicle:
● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving
in dangerous places.
● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump
could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and espe-
cially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.
● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.
● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that
there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped
on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the
vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody,
a breakdown or fire could occur.
● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss
of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also
risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
374
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-6. Driving tips
NOTICE
■ To prevent the water damage
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does not occur.
● Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
● Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ulti-
mately damage.
● Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and pre-
mature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and
transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
■ When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check
the depth of the water and the bottom of the riverbed for firmness. Drive
slowly and avoid deep water.
■ Inspection after off-road driving
● Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake
discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system compo-
nents.
● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driv-
ing that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
375
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
Winter driving tips
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tempera-
tures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire
chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.
Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away
the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accu-
mulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the
tires or on the brakes.
● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before
getting in the vehicle.
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road con-
ditions.
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before
driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a man-
ner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations
Before driving the vehicle
When driving the vehicle
376
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
4-6. Driving tips
● Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking
brake, make sure to block the wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehi-
cle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.
● If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm
that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P
*.
*: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any
other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be
shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
(0.20 in. [5 mm] in diameter)
Cross chain
(0.25 in. [6.3 mm] in diameter)
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
● Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
When parking the vehicle
Selecting tire chains
1
2
Regulations on the use of tire chains
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
377
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
WARNING
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting
operations that cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
● Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system. (if equipped)
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legiti-
mate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera-
tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
379
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5
Interior features
5-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front automatic air
conditioning system ........ 380
Rear air conditioning
system............................. 391
Heated steering wheel/
seat heaters/
seat ventilators................ 395
5-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list................ 399
• Interior lights................. 400
• Personal lights ..............401
5-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features ..... 402
• Glove box...................... 403
• Console box.................. 404
• Overhead console......... 405
• Cup holders .................. 406
• Bottle holders................ 408
• Card holders................. 409
• Auxiliary boxes.............. 409
Luggage compartment
features........................... 410
5-4. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features....... 412
• Cool box........................ 412
• Sun visors..................... 414
• Vanity mirror ................. 414
• Clock............................. 415
• Outside temperature
display........................... 415
• Power outlets................ 416
• Wireless charger........... 418
• Armrest......................... 426
• Coat hooks.................... 426
• Assist grips ................... 427
Garage door opener.......... 428
Safety Connect ................. 435
380
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front automatic air conditioning system
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the
temperature.
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according
to the temperature setting.
Press to display the air conditioning control screen.
Control panel
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
381
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
■ Changing the air flow mode
Press .
The air flow mode switches
each time the button is pressed.
Air flows to the upper body
Air flows to the upper body
and feet
Air flows to the feet
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger oper-
ates
Select the air flow mode* (left-
hand side)
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates
Select the air flow mode* (right-
hand side)
Display the option control
screen (→P. 382)
Adjust the fan speed setting
Display the rear air conditioning control screen (→P. 384)
To adjust or select settings, touch the screen button.
*: ⎯ Air flows to the upper body
⎯ Air flows to the upper body and feet
⎯ Air flows to the feet
1
2
3
4
Control screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
382
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Select to set cooling and dehu-
midification function on/off
Adjust the temperature for
driver, front passenger and rear
seats separately (Individual
mode) (→P. 383)
Prevent ice from building up on
the windshield and wiper
blades (if equipped) (→P. 386)
Remove pollen from the air (Micro dust and pollen filter) (→P. 386)
■ Using the automatic mode
Press .
Adjust the temperature setting.
To stop the operation, press .
■
Automatic mode indicator
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the auto-
matic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for func-
tions other than that operated is maintained.
Option control screen
1
2
3
Air conditioning controls
4
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
383
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
To turn on the individual mode, perform any of the following proce-
dures:
● Press “4-ZONE” on the option control screen.
● Adjust the passenger’s side temperature setting.
● Change the rear air conditioning setting
The indicator comes on when the individual mode is on.
To return to the simultaneous mode, press “4-ZONE”.
In the simultaneous mode, only or on the driver’s side can
be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.
Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats sepa-
rately (Individual mode)
384
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Press on the control
screen to display the rear air con-
ditioning control screen.
Adjust the temperature set-
ting (left-hand rear seat)
Adjust the fan speed setting
Adjust the temperature set-
ting (right-hand rear seat)
Select to set automatic mode
Turn the fan off
■ Using the automatic mode
Press “REAR AUTO”.
The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and speed will
be set automatically.
Press “∧” to increase the temperature and “∨” to decrease the
temperature.
Air outlets for the right-hand and left-hand may be set separately
depending on the temperature setting.
■
Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “∧” (increase) “∨” or (decrease).
Operating the switch will enter the individual mode. (→P. 383)
■
Adjusting the fan speed setting
Press (increase) or (decrease).
The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)
Press “REAR OFF” to turn the fan off.
■
Turning the rear air conditioning system off
Press “REAR OFF”.
Changing the rear seat settings
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
385
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between (recirculated air mode) and
(outside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.
■
Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side win-
dows.
Press .
Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the
recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and
temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press again when the wind-
shield is defogged.
Other functions
386
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■
Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Press .
Press the switch again to turn the defogger off.
■
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press on the control screen.
Press .
Outside air mode switches to recirculated air mode. Pollen is removed
from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.
Usually the system will turn off automatically approximately 1 to 3 min-
utes.
To stop the operation, press again.
■
Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the wind-
shield and wiper blades.
Press on the control screen.
Press .
Press again to turn the de-icer off.
1
2
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
387
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected air flow mode.
■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air out-
lets
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close the vent.
Air outlets
Front outlets Rear outlets
1
2
388
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and
the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after is pressed.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning “A/C” on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the wind-
shield effectively.
● If you turn “A/C” off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the out-
side/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effec-
tive in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During
cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle
interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the
temperature setting or the inside temperature.
■ When outside air temperature is low
The dehumidification function may not operate even when “A/C” is pressed.
■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air condition-
ing system is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air condition-
ing system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also
reduce fuel consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch
is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing
.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
● In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is cold,
the following may occur.
• Outside air mode does not switch to recirculated air mode.
• The dehumidification function operates.
• The operation cancels after approximately 1 minute.
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .
● In extremely humid weather, the windows may fog up.
● The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned
off.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
389
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to
be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
■ The rear window defogger and windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)
can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped) is on
The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15
minutes.
■ Using the voice command system
Air conditioning system can be operated using voice commands. For details,
refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ While the cool box is on (if equipped)
The front air conditioning system cannot be turned off.
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 485
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. A/C automatic mode switch operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 582)
390
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
● Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid
weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and
that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog
up, blocking your vision.
■ To prevent burns
● Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers are on.
● Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the
front pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer is on. (vehicles with wind-
shield wiper de-icer)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
● Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers
from defogging.
391
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
Rear air conditioning system
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “∧” to increase the temperature and “∨” to decrease the tem-
perature on .
The temperature for the right-hand and left-hand seats can be set sepa-
rately.
■
Adjusting the fan speed setting
Press “>” (increase) or “<” (decrease) on .
The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)
Press to turn the fan off.
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according
to the temperature setting.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
393
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
■ Using the automatic mode
Press .
Adjust the temperature setting.
To stop the operation, press .
■ If the system is operated manually in automatic mode
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the auto-
matic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for func-
tions other than that operated is maintained.
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected air flow mode.
■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air out-
lets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob fully to the
back of the vehicle to close
the vent.
Air conditioning controls
Air outlets
1
2
3
1
2
395
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
Heated steering wheel
∗
/seat heaters/seat
ventilators
∗: If equipped
Heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips of the
steering wheel and seats. Seat ventilators maintain good airflow
by blowing air from the seats.
WARNING
● Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories
comes in contact with the steering wheel and seats when the heater is on:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
● Observe the following precautions to prevent the minor burns or overheat-
ing:
• Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat
heater.
• Do not use seat heater more than necessary.
NOTICE
● Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
● To prevent battery discharge, do not use the functions when the engine is
not running.
396
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Turns the heated steering wheel
on/off
The indicator light comes on when
the heated steering wheel is oper-
ating.
● The heated steering wheel can be used when the engine switch is in IGNI-
TION ON mode.
● The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
● If the indicator light flashes, press the switch to turn the heated steering
wheel off and then press the switch again. If the indicator light still flashes, a
malfunction may be occurring. Turn the heated steering wheel off and have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Seat heater switches
The indicator light (yellow) on the
switch comes on when the seat
heater is operating.
Seat ventilator switches
The indicator light (green) on the
switch comes on when the seat
ventilator is operating.
Level indicator lights
The seat heater temperature level
or the seat ventilator fan speed
level (for front seats only) is dis-
played.
“AUTO” indicator lights
Heated steering wheel (if equipped)
Front seat heaters and ventilators
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
397
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
■ Modes and indicators
The mode can be changed by pressing the switch.
*: When automatic mode is selected, the level automatically changes
depending on the air conditioning settings.
■ The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Replacing the air filters
Filters are installed in the seat ventilators. For replacement of the filters, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
■ Customization
The automatic mode settings for the seat heaters and ventilators can be
changed. (→P. 582)
Mode “AUTO” indicator light Level indicator lights
Off Off Off
Automatic* On 3 to 1, or off
Hi Off 3
Mid Off 2
Lo Off 1
398
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
For left-hand second seat
For right-hand second seat
High heating temperature
Low heating temperature
To turn on the seat heater, press
“HI” or “LO”.
Off
■ The seat heaters can be used when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Second outboard seat heaters (if equipped)
1
2
3
4
45
399
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-2. Using the interior lights
5
Interior features
Interior lights list
Front interior lights (→P. 400)
Front personal lights (→P. 401)
Rear interior lights (→P. 400)
Rear personal lights (→P. 401)
Inside door handle lights
Footwell lights
Scuff lights
Engine switch light
Door courtesy lights
Door trim lights
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
401
5-2. Using the interior lights
5
Interior features
Front
Turns the light on/off
Rear
Turns the light on/off
■ Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to engine switch mode, the
presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and
whether the doors are open/closed.
■ To prevent battery discharge
If the interior lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights
will go off automatically after 20 minutes:
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. adjust the time elapsed before the interior lights automatically
turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 582)
Personal lights
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the lights on longer than neces-
sary when the engine is not running.
402
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Card holders (→P. 409)
Overhead console (→P. 405)
Glove box (→P. 403)
Bottle holders (→P. 408)
Door pockets
Auxiliary boxes (→P. 409)
Console box (→P. 404)
Cool box (if equipped)
(→P. 412)
Cup holders (→P. 406)
Auxiliary box (if equipped)
(→P. 409)
Wireless charger (if equipped)
(→P. 418)
WARNING
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
403
5-3. Using the storage features
5
Interior features
Open (push button)
Lock with the mechanical key
Unlock with the mechanical key
■ Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
■ Removing the separate tray
Glove box
1
2
3
Pull out the separate tray while releasing
the clips.
WARNING
Keep the glove box closed while driving.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
404
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-3. Using the storage features
Your vehicle is equipped with either a lower console box or cool box.
For vehicles with the cool box, refer to page 412.
Upper console box
Press the tab to open.
Lower console box (if equipped)
Lift the lever to open.
Remove the tray.
Console box
1
2
WARNING
Keep the console box closed while driving.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
405
5-3. Using the storage features
5
Interior features
Press the button.
Overhead console
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for storing
Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the overhead console to open and the items inside
may fall out, resulting in an accident.
■ While driving
Do not leave the overhead console open.
Items may fall out and cause injury.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
407
5-3. Using the storage features
5
Interior features
■ Removing the cup holder insert (front cup holders)
Pull up the insert.
Cup holder insert may be removed for
cleaning.
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.
Even with the lid is closed, items must not be stored in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking, cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the cup holders (vehicles with a rear cup holder)
Stow the cup holders before stowing the rear armrest.
408
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-3. Using the storage features
Bottle holders
Front seats Second seats
NOTICE
■ Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-
tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may
spill and glasses may break.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
409
5-3. Using the storage features
5
Interior features
Your vehicle is equipped with either a front auxiliary box or wireless
charger.
For vehicles with wireless charger, refer to page 418.
Card holders
Sun visor Instrument panel
Auxiliary boxes
Front (if equipped) Rear (type A)
Press the lid to open.
Rear (type B)
Press the button to open.
410
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-3. Using the storage features
Luggage compartment features
Raise the hook to use.
The cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
To hang the cargo net, use the
cargo net hooks and rear tie-down
hooks.
The cargo net itself is not included
as an original equipment.
Remove the cover. Hold the warn-
ing reflector with the bands.
The warning reflector itself is not
included as an original equipment.
Cargo hooks
Cargo net hooks
Warning reflector holder
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
411
5-3. Using the storage features
5
Interior features
Remove the cover. Hold the first-
aid kit with a band.
The first-aid kit itself is not included
as an original equipment.
First-aid kit holder
WARNING
● To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when not
in use.
● Keep the auxiliary box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden
swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an
open auxiliary box or the items stored inside.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the cargo net hooks
Avoid hanging things other than a cargo net on it.
412
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
Other interior features
While the engine is running, the cool box, which is cooled by the air
conditioning, can be used.
Lift the lid while pulling up the
lower lever to release the lock.
Turns the cool box on/off
When on, the indicator light comes
on.
If the front air conditioning system
is not in use, the front air condition-
ing system is automatically turned
on when the cool box is turned on.
■ While the cool box is on
The front air conditioning system cannot be turned off.
■ When the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below
The cool box may not operate.
Cool box (if equipped)
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
413
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
WARNING
Keep the cool box closed while driving.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the cool box on longer than nec-
essary when the engine is not running.
414
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
Main sun visor
To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side posi-
tion, flip down, unhook, and
swing it to the side.
To use the side extender, place
the visor in the side position,
then slide it backward.
Sub sun visor
Flip down with the main sun visor
in position or .
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the cover
is opened.
If the vanity lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights
will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
Sun visors
1
2
3
2 3
Vanity mirror
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the vanity lights on for extended
periods when the engine is not running.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
415
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
Refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL” for adjust-
ment.
■ The clock is displayed when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
The displayed temperature
ranges from -22°F (-30°C) up to
122°F (50°C).
■ The outside temperature is displayed when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When --- is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
■ Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit
of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
Clock
Outside temperature display
416
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
The power outlet can be used for the following components:
12 V DC: Accessories that run on less than 10 A
120 V AC: Accessories that use less than 100 W
■ Center of console
Front (12 V DC)
Press the lid to open.
Rear (12 V DC)
Power outlets
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
417
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
■ Luggage compartment (120 V AC)
■ The power outlet can be used when
12 V DC: The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
120 V AC: The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlets
Close the power outlet lid when not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
12 V DC: Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
120 V AC: Do not use a 120 V AC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 120 V AC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the pro-
tection circuit will cut the power supply.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
■ Appliances that may not operate properly (120 V AC)
The following 120 V AC appliances may not operate even if their power
consumption is under 100 W.
● Appliances with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process precise data
● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
418
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
A portable device can be charged by just placing Qi standard wireless
charge compatible portable devices according to the Wireless Power
Consortium, such as smart phones and mobile batteries, etc., on the
charge area.
This function cannot be used with portable devices that are larger
than the charging area. Also, depending on the portable device, it may
not operate as normal. Please read the operation manual for portable
devices to be used.
■ The “Qi” symbol
The “Qi” symbol is a trademark of the Wireless Power Consortium.
■ Name for all parts
Power supply switch
Operation indicator light
Charge area
Wireless charger (if equipped)
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
419
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
■ Using the wireless charger
Press the lid to open.
Press the power supply
switch of the wireless char-
ger.
Switches on and off with each
press of the power supply
switch.
When turned on, the operation
indicator light (green) comes on.
Even with the engine off, the on/
off state of the power supply
switch is memorized.
Place the charging side of
the portable device down.
When charging, the operation
indicator light (orange) comes
on.
If charging is not occurring, try
placing the portable device as
close to the center of the
charging area as possible.
When charging is complete, the operation indicator light (green) comes
on.
● Recharging function
• When charging is complete and after a fixed time in the charge
suspension state, charging restarts.
• When the portable device is moved, charging is stopped for a
moment and then it restarts.
1
2
3
420
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
■ Lighting conditions of operation indicator light
*: Depending on the portable device, there are cases where the operation
indicator light will continue being lit up orange even after the charging is
complete.
● When the operation indicator light flashes
When an error occurs, the operation indicator light flashes an
orange color. Handle the error based on the following table.
Operation indicator light Conditions
Turning off
When the Wireless charger power supply is
off
Green (comes on)
On Standby (charging possible state)
When charging is complete*
Orange (comes on)
When placing the portable device on the
charging area (detecting the portable device)
Charging
Operation indicator
light
Suspected causes Handling method
Flashing repeatedly
once every second
(Orange)
Vehicle to charger com-
munication failure.
Contact your Toyota
dealer.
Repeatedly flashes
3 times continuously
(Orange)
A foreign substance is
between the portable
device and charge area.
Remove the foreign
substance from
between portable
device and the charge
area.
The portable device is
out of sync due to the
device being shifted from
its position.
Place the portable
device near the center
of the charge area.
Repeatedly flashes
4 times continuously
(Orange)
Temperature rising
within the wireless char-
ger.
Stop charging at once
and start charging
again after for a while.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
421
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
■ The wireless charger can be operated when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ Usable portable devices
Qi standard wireless charge standard can be used on compatible devices.
However, not all Qi standard devices and compatibility are guaranteed.
Starting with mobile phones and smart phones, it is aimed for low power elec-
trically supplied portable devices of no more than 5W.
■ When covers and accessories are attached to portable devices
Do not charge in situations where cover and accessories not able to handle
Qi are attached to the portable device. Depending on the type of cover and
accessory, it may not be possible to charge. When charging is not performed
even with the portable device placed on the charge area, remove the cover
and accessories.
■ While charging, noise enters the AM radio
Turn off the wireless charger and confirm that the noise has decreased. If the
noise decreases, continuously pushing the power supply switch of the wire-
less charger for 2 seconds, the frequency of the charger can be changed and
the noise can be reduced.
Also, on that occasion, the operation indicator light will flash orange 2 times.
■ Important points of the wireless charger
● If the electronic key cannot be detected within the vehicle interior, charging
cannot be done. When the door is opened and closed, charging may be
temporarily suspended.
● When charging, the wireless charging device and portable device will get
warmer, however this is not a malfunction.
When a portable device gets warm while charging, charging may stop due
to the protection function on the portable device side. In this case, when the
temperature of the portable device drops significantly, charge again.
■ Operation sounds
When the power supply is turned on, while searching for the portable device a
sound will be produced, however this is not a malfunction.
424
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
When charging a portable device, for safety reasons, the driver should not
operate the portable device while driving.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators, as well as
any other electrical medical device, should consult their physician about the
usage of the wireless charger. The operations of the wireless charger may
have an affect on medical devices.
■ To prevent damage or burns
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in a possibility of equipment failure and damage,
catch fire, burns due to overheat.
● Do not insert any metallic objects between the charging area and the por-
table device while charging
● Do not attach stickers, metallic objects, etc., to the charger area or porta-
ble device
● Do not cover with cloth, etc., and charge
● Do not charge portable devices other than designated
● Do not attempt to dismantle for disassembly or modifications
● Do not hit or apply a strong force
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
425
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
NOTICE
■ Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly
In the following conditions, the wireless charger may not operate correctly
● The portable device is fully charged
● There is foreign matter between the charge area and portable device
● The temperature of the portable device gets higher from charging
● The charging surface of the portable device is facing up
● The placement of the portable device is out of alignment with the charge
area
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical
noise
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
In addition, excluding the above-mentioned, when the charger does not per-
form normally or the operation indicator light is flashing continuously, it is
considered that the wireless charger is malfunctioning. Contact your Toyota
dealer.
■ To prevent failure or damage to data
● Do not bring magnetic cards, such as credit cards, or magnetic recording
media, etc., close to the charger while charging, otherwise, data may dis-
appear under the influence of magnetism. Also, do not bring precision
instruments such as wrist watches, etc., close to the charger, as such
objects may break.
● Do not leave portable devices in the cabin. The temperature inside the
cabin may become high, when under the sun, and cause damage to the
device.
■ To prevent battery discharge
When the engine is stopped, do not use the wireless charger for a long
time.
426
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
Fold down the armrest for use.
The coat hooks are provided with
the second seat assist grips.
Armrest
NOTICE
To prevent damage, do not apply too much load on the armrest.
Coat hooks
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles,
causing death or serious injury.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
427
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
An assist grip (Type A) can be used to support your body while sitting
on the seat.
An assist grip (Type B) can be used when getting in or out of the vehi-
cle and others.
Assist grip (Type A)
Assist grip (Type B)
Assist grips
1
2
WARNING
Do not use the assist grip (Type A) when getting in or out of the vehicle or
rising from your seat.
NOTICE
To prevent damage, do not hang heavy objects or put a heavy load on the
assist grip.
428
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
Garage door opener
The HomeLink
®
wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming methods on the following pages to determine the
method which is appropriate for the device.
HomeLink
®
indicator light
Garage door operation indica-
tors
HomeLink
®
icon
Illuminates while HomeLink
®
is
operating.
Buttons
■ Before programming HomeLink
®
● During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or
other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that peo-
ple and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to
prevent injury or other potential harm.
● It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote
control transmitter for more accurate programming.
● Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be
equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may
need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the
“Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor.
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems,
security systems, and other devices.
Programming the HomeLink
®
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
429
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
■ Programming HomeLink
®
Steps through must be performed within 60 seconds, other-
wise the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not
be able to be completed.
Press and release the HomeLink
®
button you want to program
and check that the HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes (orange).
Point the remote control
transmitter for the device at
the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in.
(25 to 75 mm) from the
HomeLink
®
buttons.
Keep the HomeLink
®
indicator
light in view while programming.
Program a device.
Programming a device other than an entry gate (for U.S.A.
owners)
Press and hold the remote control transmitter button until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to
rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green
(fixed code), then release the button.
Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)
Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 sec-
ond intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink
®
indicator light
changes from slowly flashing (orange) to rapidly flashing (green)
(rolling code) or continuously lit (green) (fixed code).
1 3
1
2
3
430
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
Test the HomeLink
®
operation by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button and observing the indicator light:
● Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device
has completed. The garage door or other device should oper-
ate when a HomeLink
®
button is pressed and released.
● Indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener motor
or other device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete
programming, firmly press and hold the HomeLink
®
button for
2 seconds then release it.
● If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed
to “Programming a rolling code system”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the
remaining HomeLink
®
buttons.
■ Programming a rolling code system
2 or more people may be necessary to complete rolling code pro-
gramming.
Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the unit. The
name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
Refer to the owner’s manual
supplied with the garage door
opener motor for details.
Press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button.
Perform within 30 sec-
onds after performing .
4
5
1
2
3
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
431
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button (inside the
vehicle) for 2 seconds and
release it. Repeat this
sequence (press/hold/
release) up to 3 times to
complete programming.
If the garage door opener
motor operates when the
HomeLink
®
button is
pressed, the garage door
opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink
®
signal.
■ Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only avail-
able for compatible devices)
When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the sta-
tus of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators
in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener
motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility,
refer to www.HomeLink.com.)
Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has
been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to
HomeLink
®
, both garage door operation indicators will flash rap-
idly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will
blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, perform
and within the first 10
presses of the HomeLink
®
button after programming has been
completed.
Press a programmed HomeLink
®
button to operate a garage
door.
Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink
®
button, after the
garage door operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the
establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door
opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will
flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor
will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.
3
1
2 3
2
3
432
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
■ Reprogramming a single HomeLink
®
button
When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already
have devices registered to them can be overwritten:
With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button.
When the HomeLink
®
indicator starts flashing (orange), continue
to hold the HomeLink
®
button and perform “Programming Home-
Link
®
” (it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink
®
indicator to
start flashing).
Press the appropriate HomeLink
®
button. The HomeLink
®
indicator
light should turn on.
The status of the opening and
closing of a garage door is shown
by the indicators.
Opening
Closing
This function is only available if the
garage door opener motor used is
a compatible device. (To check
device compatibility, refer to
www.HomeLink.com.)
The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the
garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage
door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals
from the garage door may not be received.
To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either
HomeLink
®
buttons and or and simultaneously.
The last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.
Operating HomeLink
®
Garage door operation indicators
1
2
1
1
2
Color Status
Orange (flashing) Currently opening/closing
Green Opening/closing has completed
Red (flashing) Feedback signals cannot be received
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
433
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
Press and hold the 2 outside but-
tons for 10 seconds until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light
changes from continuously lit
(orange) to rapidly flashing
(green).
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink
®
memory.
■ Codes stored in the HomeLink
®
memory
● The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is discon-
nected.
● If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink
®
button
that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not
be erased.
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the transmitter.
● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the
HomeLink
.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/toyota
or call 1-800-355-3515.
Erasing the entire HomeLink
®
memory (all three codes)
434
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
WARNING
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control devices
The garage door or other devices may operate, so ensure people and
objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink
compatible transceiver with any garage door
opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A
door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious
injury.
■ When operating or programming HomeLink
Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink
buttons.
435
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
Safety Connect
∗
Microphone
LED light indicators
“SOS” button
∗: If equipped
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that
uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cel-
lular technology to provide safety and security features to sub-
scribers. Safety Connect is supported by Toyota’s designated
response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per
week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select,
telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be
bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and
its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to
time, a current copy of which is available at Toyota.com. All use
of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable
Terms and Conditions.
System components
1
2
3
436
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification
*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service
providers. (→P. 438)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P. 438)
● Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (→P. 438)
● Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P. 438)
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement
and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your
Toyota dealer, call 1-800-331-4331, or push the “SOS” button in your
vehicle for further subscription details.
■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth
®
technology will not be possible
during Safety Connect.
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models.
Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the
telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availabil-
ity, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscrip-
tion terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle
Location, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United
States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada. No Safety Connect
services will function outside of the United States in countries other than
Canada.
● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommuni-
cations Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
Services
Subscription
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
437
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages.
The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish.
Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
■ Safety Connect backup battery depletion
An exclusive backup battery is built in to assist the Automatic Collision Notifi-
cation, which is activated when impact above a certain level is applied to the
vehicle, or when the airbags operate. This battery is a primary battery, and
cannot be recharged. The red LED indicator will flash to indicate that the bat-
tery should be replaced.
The backup battery will need to be replaced if the Automatic Collision Notifi-
cation operates for 60 seconds or more. For replacement, consult your Toy-
ota dealer.
When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the red indi-
cator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green
indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage
conditions:
● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Toyota dealer)
● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
438
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
5-4. Using the other interior features
■ Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the
system is designed to automatically call the response center. The
responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to
speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency.
If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automati-
cally treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emer-
gency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that
assistance be sent to the location.
■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local author-
ities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing
a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-
331-4331 and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this
service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen
vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under
certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your
vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com.
■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to
reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent
will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and
dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center
agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■
Roadside Assistance
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs,
such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the
Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the
Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Toy-
ota.com.
Safety Connect services
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
439
5-4. Using the other interior features
5
Interior features
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio
frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wire-
less phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety stan-
dards previously set by the following U.S. and international
standards bodies.
● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measure-
ment) Report 86 [1986]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic eval-
uations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engi-
neers, and physicians from universities, and government health
agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to
develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
Safety information for Safety Connect
441
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.......... 442
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior........... 445
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements................... 448
General maintenance........ 451
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs......................... 454
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions..................... 455
Hood ................................. 457
Engine compartment......... 458
Tires.................................. 471
Tire inflation pressure ....... 480
Wheels.............................. 483
Air conditioning filter.......... 485
Electronic key battery........ 487
Checking and replacing
fuses............................... 489
Headlight aim.................... 493
Light bulbs......................... 495
442
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly
with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the
front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
● Rear spoiler (if equipped) may not be washable in some automatic car
washes. There may also be an increased risk of damage to vehicle.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of
the windows.
● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is
closed properly.
■ Wheels (Including surrounding parts)
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.
● Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.
● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following pre-
cautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driv-
ing or parking in hot weather
■ Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in
prime condition:
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
443
6-1. Maintenance and care
6
Maintenance and care
■ Notes for a smart key system
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effec-
tive range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key in a posi-
tion 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being
washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information dis-
play and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock
all the doors.
WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■ When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield
wiper)
● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is
located is touched by hand
● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into
the raindrop sensor
■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has
cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
■ Precautions regarding the Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may mal-
function.
If this occurs, consult your Toyota dealer.
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wip-
ers may operate unexpectedly in the fol-
lowing situations, and may result in
hands being caught or other serious inju-
ries and cause damage to the wiper
blades.
OFF
AUTO
444
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing wind-
shield wiper)
Turn off the wiper switch.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper
blades may be damaged.
■ When using a high pressure car wash
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured
cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they
come into contact with high-pressure water.
• Traction related parts
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts
445
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-1. Maintenance and care
6
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
● If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with
neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and water.
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
all remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated area.
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted
to approximately 1%.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and water.
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior
and keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Cleaning the leather areas
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
446
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-1. Maintenance and care
■ Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to
maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge
or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. The
excellent results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
WARNING
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch
fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(→P. 40)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect
off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehi-
cle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alco-
hol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
447
6-1. Maintenance and care
6
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with Toyota
Safety Sense P)
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
(→P. 238)
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear quarter windows and rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear quarter windows and rear win-
dow, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires
or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the
window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater
wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
448
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can
be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty
coverage.
The use of Toyota repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the “Owner’s Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and reg-
ular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to
perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following main-
tenance:
General maintenance
Scheduled maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
449
6-2. Maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if
a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war-
ranty coverage.
■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the message.
To reset the message, follow the procedures described below:
Press or of the meter control switches, select .
Press or of the meter control switches, select “Scheduled
Maintenance” and then press .
Select the “Yes” and press .
A message is displayed on the multi-information display.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with
the latest service information. They are well informed about the operation of
all systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take
care of it.
1
2
3
4
450
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-2. Maintenance
WARNING
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible serious injury or death.
■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid
exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (→P. 467)
451
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-2. Maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended
that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention
of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery Check the connections. (→P. 467)
Brake fluid Is the brake fluid at the correct level?(→P. 464)
Engine coolant
Is the engine coolant at the correct level?
(→P. 463)
Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct level? (→P. 460)
Exhaust system
There should not be any fumes or strange
sounds.
Power steering fluid
Is the power steering fluid at the correct level?
(→P. 466)
Radiator/condenser
The radiator and condenser should be free from
foreign objects. (→P. 464)
Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid? (→P. 470)
452
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal
• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly
(without uneven pedal effort or catching).
Automatic transmission
“Park” mechanism
• When parked on a slope and the shift lever is
in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clear-
ance from the floor? (→P. 566)
• Does the brake pedal have the correct
amount of free play? (→P. 566)
Brakes
• The vehicle should not pull to one side when
the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too close to
the floor when the brakes are applied.
Head restraints
• Do the head restraints move smoothly and
lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Do the indicators and buzzers function prop-
erly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Are the headlights aimed correctly? (→P. 493)
Parking brake
• Does the parking brake lever move smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the parking
brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.
Seats • Do the seat controls operate properly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the correct
amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange sounds com-
ing from the steering wheel.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
453
6-2. Maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors • Do the doors operate smoothly?
Engine hood
• Does the engine hood lock system work prop-
erly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage
after the vehicle has been parked.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or exces-
sively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.
Windshield wipers/rear
window wiper
• The wiper blades should not show any signs
of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or
deformation.
• The wiper blades should clear the windshield/
rear window without streaking or skipping.
WARNING
■ If the engine is running
Turn off the engine and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per-
forming maintenance checks.
454
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the
emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and
may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the
vehicle.
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary
malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehi-
cle is driven 40 or more times.
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system
monitors the operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after sev-
eral driving trips
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
455
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the cor-
rect procedures as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition
(→P. 467)
• Warm water • Baking soda • Grease
• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level
(→P. 464)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)
Engine coolant
level (→P. 463)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high
quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-
life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with
50 % coolant and 50 % deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
Engine oil level
(→P. 460)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
Fuses
(→P. 489)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Headlight aim
(→P. 493)
• Phillips-head screwdriver
Light bulbs
(→P. 495)
• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as origi-
nal
• Phillips-head screwdriver • Flathead screwdriver
• Wrench
Power steering
fluid level
(→P. 466)
• Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON
®
II or III
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding power steering fluid)
Radiator and con-
denser (→P. 464)
⎯
Tire inflation
pressure
(→P. 480)
• Tire pressure gauge • Compressed air source
456
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
(→P. 470)
• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for win-
ter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)
WARNING
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions:
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the
engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Be sure the engine switch is off. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON
mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air condi-
tioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 464)
■ When working on or under the vehicle
Do not get under the vehicle with just the jack supporting it.
Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.
from getting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air.
Items Parts and tools
457
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Hood
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Lift the hood catch and lift the
hood.
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1
2
WARNING
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
458
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
Power steering fluid reservoir
(→P. 466)
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 460)
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 463)
Cooling fans (→P. 464)
Engine oil filler cap (→P. 461)
Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 464)
Fuse box (→P. 489)
Washer fluid tank (→P. 470)
Battery (→P. 467)
Condenser (→P. 464)
Radiator (→P. 464)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
459
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
■ Installing the clips
Push up center portion
Insert
Press
Engine compartment cover
1
2
3
NOTICE
■ After installing an engine compartment cover
Make sure the cover is securely installed in its original position.
460
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may
differ depending on the type
of vehicle or engine.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
6
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
461
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as already
in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed
before adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following
situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be
refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or
after replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or
when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently
through heavy traffic
Engine oil selection →P. 562
Oil quantity (Low → Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Items Clean funnel
1
2
3
462
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ After changing the engine oil
The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following pro-
cedures:
Press or of the meter control switches, select .
Press or of the meter control switches, select “Oil Maintenance”
and then press .
Select the “Yes” and press .
A message is displayed on the multi-information display.
WARNING
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should
be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine
oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
463
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“F”
“L”
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50 % coolant and 50 %
deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir cap, radiator cap,
drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer
test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.
Engine coolant
1
2
3
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damage to parts or paint.
464
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
“MAX” line
“MIN” line
■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
■ Refilling brake fluid
Turn the engine switch off.
Depress the brake pedal more than 40 times.
Remove the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake fluid up to the
“MAX” line.
If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may overflow.
Radiator and condenser
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri-
ous injuries, such as burns.
Brake fluid
1
2
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
465
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
Use only newly opened brake fluid.
WARNING
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your eyes, flush the affected area with
clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs
frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
466
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Fluid level
The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.
Full (when hot)
Add fluid (when hot)
Full (when cold)
Add fluid (when cold)
Hot: The vehicles has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for
20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures.
(Fluid temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C]).
Cold: The engine has not been run for about 5 hours.
(Room temperature, 50°F - 85°F [10°C - 30°C]).
■ Checking the fluid level
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Clean all dirt off the reservoir.
Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinstall the cap and remove it again.
Check the fluid level.
Power steering fluid
1
2
3
4
Fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON
®
II or III
Items Rag or paper, clean funnel (only for adding fluid)
1
2
3
4
5
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
467
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
WARNING
■ When checking the reservoir
Take care as the reservoir may be hot.
NOTICE
■ When adding fluid
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.
■ After replacing the reservoir cap
Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or
damage.
Battery
1
2
468
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and dis-
connecting the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
Shift the shift lever to P
Open and close any of the doors.
Restart the engine.
● Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible imme-
diately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless
remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine
may not start with the engine switch turned off. However, the engine will
operate normally from the second attempt.
● The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is recon-
nected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in
before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine
before disconnect the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery
if the engine switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts at both methods, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near
battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
469
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
WARNING
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
470
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
Washer fluid
WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as
damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
471
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Tires
Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check
the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the
tread. Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.
New tread
Worn tread
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or “ ”
mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Toyota recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire
pressure warning system after
tire rotation.
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
Checking tires
Tire rotation
1
2
3
Front
472
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire infla-
tion pressure before serious problems arise.
● If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is
warned by a screen display and a warning light. (→P. 520)
● The tire pressure detected by
the tire pressure warning sys-
tem can be displayed on the
multi-information display.
◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure
warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be
initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID
codes registered by your Toyota dealer.
◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
● When rotating the tires.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
Tire pressure warning system
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
473
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the engine switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moved.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (→P. 566)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate
based on this pressure level.
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Press and hold the tire pres-
sure warning reset switch
until the tire pressure warn-
ing light blinks slowly 3 times.
“--” will be displayed for inflation pressure of each tire on the multi-
information display while the tire pressure warning system deter-
mines the position on the multi-information display.
When position of each tire is determined, the inflation pressure of
each tire will be displayed on the multi-information display.
Drive the vehicle at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for
approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
When initialization is complete, the inflation pressure of each tire will
be displayed on the multi-information display.
Depending on the vehicle and driving conditions, initialization may
take up to approximately 1 hour to complete.
◆ Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by your Toyota dealer.
1
2
3
4
5
474
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size
or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not reg-
istered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driv-
ing for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the
replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the tire,
see the load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (→P. 571)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
475
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■ Tire types
● Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When install-
ing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all
season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance com-
pared with summer tires in highway driving.
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 375)
■ When rotating the tires
Make sure that the engine switch is off. If the tires are rotated while the
engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the tire position information will
not be updated.
If this accidentally occurs, either turn the engine switch to off and then to
IGNITION ON mode, or initialize the system after checking that the tire
pressure is properly adjusted.
476
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the speci-
fied level.
■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not oper-
ate properly
● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate
properly.
• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equip-
ment) tire.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
• Tire chains etc. are equipped.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the
wheels or wheel housings.
• If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal
reception.
• If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is
put near the spare tire.
• If tires not equipped with the tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters are used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
● Performance may be affected in the following situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large
display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or
electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or
other wireless communication device
● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go
off could be extended.
● When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has
burst, the warning may not function.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
477
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■ The initialization operation
● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pres-
sure. Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization
or tire inflation pressure adjustment.
● If you have accidentally turned the engine switch off during initialization,
it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will
restart automatically when the engine switch has been turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode for the next time.
● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not neces-
sary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the
tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.
● While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pres-
sures are not being displayed on the multi-information display, if the
inflation pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure warning light will come
on.
■ Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system
The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accor-
dance with the conditions under which it was initialized. For this reason,
the system may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a
low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was
adjusted to when the system was initialized.
■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization may take longer to complete if the vehicle is driven on an
unpaved road. When performing initialization, drive on a paved road if
possible. Depending on the driving environment and condition of the tires,
initialization will be completed in approximately 10 minutes. If initialization
is not complete after driving approximately 10 minutes, continue driving
for a while.
If the inflation of each tire is not displayed after driving for approximately 1
hour, perform the following procedure.
● Park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes. Then
drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 20 minutes.
However, in the following situations, the tire inflation pressure will not be
recorder and the system will not operate properly. Perform initialization.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure
warning light does not blink 3 times.
● After performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
If the inflation pressure of each tire is still not displayed, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
478
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
FCC ID: PAXPMVC015
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING
■ Tire pressure warning system operation
The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately
if a tire bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs.
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first
adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the
tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation
pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is
actually normal.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
479
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled
correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not
installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the
tire pressure warning valves could be bound.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than
those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 472)
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-
holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing
the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads
may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s
wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
481
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust
the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Put the tire valve cap back on.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once
a month. Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
Inspection and adjustment procedure
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
482
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire
inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appear-
ance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as
heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after
driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is
balanced.
WARNING
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur
which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/ or tire damage
● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards,
expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and
cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.
483
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Wheels
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are
equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and
inset
*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plas-
tic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters must be installed. (→P. 472)
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of
handling control.
Wheel selection
Aluminum wheel precautions
484
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri-
ous injury.
■ When installing the wheel nuts
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
■ Use of defective wheels prohibited
Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing
an accident.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with
the tapered ends facing inward.
Installing the nuts with the tapered
ends facing outward can cause the
wheel to break and eventually cause
the wheel to come off while driving,
which could lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
Tapered
portion
485
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Air conditioning filter
Turn the engine switch IGNITION ON mode and switch to recircu-
lated air mode, then turn the engine switch off.
Open the glove box and remove the separate tray. (→P. 403)
Remove the filter cover.
Remove the filter case.
If the filter is dirty, clean by blow-
ing compressed air through the fil-
ter from the downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from
the filter and blow for approxi-
mately 2 minutes at 72 psi
(500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm
2
or bar).
If it is not available, have the filter
cleaned by your Toyota dealer.
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly
to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
1
2
3
ITY43C030
4
Cleaning method
486
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the air conditioning filter
and replace it with a new one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on the fil-
ter should be pointing up.
■ Checking interval
Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the
maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more
frequent cleaning or early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
Replacement method
UP
UP
UP
ITY43C090
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the system
● When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always
installed.
● When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.
487
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Electronic key battery
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small Phillips-head screwdriver
● Lithium battery (CR2032)
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver with
a rag.
Remove the depleted battery.
When removing the cover, if the
battery cannot be seen due to the
electronic key module attaching to
the upper cover, remove the elec-
tronic key module from the cover
so that the battery is visible as
shown in the illustration.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
Replacing the battery
1
2
3
488
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance
shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manu-
facturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.
WARNING
■ Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.
Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
489
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Checking and replacing fuses
Turn the engine switch off.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
Driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may
have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as nec-
essary.
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
491
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Check if the fuse is blown.
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rat-
ing. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type C and D:
Contact your Toyota dealer.
4
1
2
Type A Type B
Type C Type D
492
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (→P. 495)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
■ When replacing light bulbs
Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this
vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent
overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be
unusable.
WARNING
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or
injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or the fuse boxes.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer, as soon as possible.
493
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Headlight aim
Adjustment bolt A
(Vertical adjustment)
Adjustment bolt B
(Horizontal adjustment)
Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gasoline and the area
around the headlight is not deformed.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Sit in the driver’s seat.
Bounce the vehicle several times.
Vertical movement adjusting bolts
1
2
Before checking the headlight aim
1
2
3
4
494
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Using a Phillips-head screw-
driver, turn bolt A in either direc-
tion.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns.
Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as step .
If the headlight cannot be adjusted
using this procedure, take the vehi-
cle to your Toyota dealer to adjust
the headlight aim.
Adjusting the headlight aim
1
2
1
495
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Light bulbs
Check the wattage and color of the light bulb being replaced.
(→P. 567)
→P. 459
■ Front
Front side marker light
Front turn signal light
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level
of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota
dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact
your Toyota dealer.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Removing the engine compartment covers
Bulb locations
1
2
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
497
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■ Front side marker light
For the left side only:
Remove the securing clip
and move the washer fluid
filler opening.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
Replacing light bulbs
1
2
3
4
498
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Front turn signal lights
For the left side only:
Remove the securing clip
and move the washer fluid
filler opening.
To allow enough working
space, remove the bulb base
of the front side marker light.
Wrap the removed bulb base
with cloth to prevent damage to
the bulb base.
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
1
2
3
4
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
505
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■ Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
your Toyota dealer.
● Headlights/daytime running lights
● Parking lights
● Fog lights
● Side turn signal lights
● High mounted stoplight
● Stop/tail lights
● Stop lights
● Rear side marker lights
■ LED lights
The headlights/daytime running lights, parking lights, fog lights, side turn sig-
nal lights, high mounted stoplight, stop/tail lights, stop lights and rear side
marker lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take
your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not
indicate a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the
following situations:
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ When replacing light bulbs
→P. 492
506
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately
after turning off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is
unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth
to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to repair or disassemble light bulbs, connectors, electric
circuits or component parts.
Doing so may result in death or serious injury due to electric shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.
507
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers.......... 508
If your vehicle has
to be stopped in
an emergency................. 509
7-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed..................... 510
If you think something is
wrong.............................. 516
Fuel pump shut off
system ............................ 517
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds............................ 518
If a warning message is
displayed......................... 527
If you have a flat tire.......... 532
If the engine will not
start................................. 546
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........ 548
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ...................... 551
If your vehicle overheats... 554
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ............................... 557
508
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch
once again.
■ Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not
operating, the battery may discharge.
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the
vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
509
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
7-1. Essential information
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort
required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle
speed as much as possible.
To stop the engine, press and
hold the engine switch for 2
consecutive seconds or more,
or press it briefly 3 times or
more in succession.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the follow-
ing procedure:
1
2
3
4
3
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,
or press briefly 3 times or more
4
WARNING
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
5
510
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing.
● The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle
towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service,
using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/
provincial and local laws.
Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing
511
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
Towing with a sling-type truck
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
512
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
If your vehicle is transported by a
flatbed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency
towing hooks. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads
for at most 50 miles (80 km) at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
Using a flatbed truck
Emergency towing
513
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
Securely attach cables or
chains to the towing hooks.
Take care not to damage the vehi-
cle body.
Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Put the four-wheel drive control switch in “H4”. (The center differen-
tial is unlocked.)
Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
When the shift lever cannot be shifted: →P. 209
■ While towing
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will
not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
Emergency towing procedure
1
2
3
4
514
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
■ While towing
● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place
excessive stress on the towing hooks, cables or chains. The towing hooks,
cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people and
cause serious damage.
● Do not turn the engine switch off.
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be oper-
ated.
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all
four wheels raised off the ground. If the
vehicle is towed with the tires contacting
the ground, the drivetrain or related parts
may be damaged, the vehicle may fly off
the truck.
515
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is off. The
steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not use the rear emergency towing
hook.
516
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you think something is wrong
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher
than normal
● Engine oil pressure gauge continually points lower than normal.
● Voltmeter continually points higher or lower than normal.
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle proba-
bly needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms
517
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or turn it off.
Restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or
when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off
system stops the supply of fuel to the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
1
2
518
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then
goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the
system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Warning light and warning buzzer list
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
1
Indicates that:
• The brake fluid level is low; or
• The brake system is malfunctioning.
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehi-
cle may be dangerous.
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The emission control system;
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
519
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The Multi Terrain ABS; or
• The brake assist system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in: or
• The VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system;
• Trailer Sway Control;
• Active TRAC (Traction Control) system;
• The hill-start assist control system
• The Multi-terrain Select; or
• The Crawl Control;
The light will flash when any of the above systems other
than the Multi-terrain Select are operating.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(flashes or
illuminates)
(if equipped)
PCS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or
that the system is temporarily unavailable due to the vehicle
being extremely hot/cold, or dirt around a front sensor, etc.
(→P. 253, 527)
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display. (
→P. 253, 527).
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illu-
minate.
→ P. 253
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
520
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Open door warning light (warning buzzer)*
2
Indicates that a door is not fully closed
→ Check that all the doors are closed.
Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*
3
Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.
→ Fasten the seat belt.
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning
buzzer)
*
3
Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt
→ Fasten the seat belt.
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 4.0 gal.
(15.0 L, 3.3 Imp. gal.) or less
→ Refuel the vehicle.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
→ P. 527
Tire pressure warning light
Indicates that:
• Flat tire
• Natural causes
• The tire pressure warning system is malfunctioning
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (→P. 523)
Automatic headlight leveling system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling
system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
521
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
*
1
: Brake system warning buzzer:
The buzzer sounds to indicate that the brake fluid level is low (with the
vehicle reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
*
2
: Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is
not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
*
3
: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat
belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfas-
tened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds.
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 20 more seconds.
Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger
that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the
vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfas-
tened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds.
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 20 more seconds.
522
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact
sensors, side impact sensors (rear), side impact sensors (front door), safing
sensor (rear), driver’s seat belt buckle switch, driver’s seat position sensor,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, airbags, interconnecting wiring and
power sources, front passenger occupant classification system, “AIR BAG
ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights, seat belt pretensioners. (→P. 38)
■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning
buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detec-
tion sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to
sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger,
and the warning light may not operate properly.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
■ If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential
lock indicator light blinks
Take the specified steps. (→P. 288)
If the brake system warning light or the malfunction indicator light also comes
on, or the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential
lock indicator light continues to blink after taking the specified steps, there
may be a malfunction in the engine, the brake system or the four-wheel drive
system. In this case, you may not be able to transfer between “H4” and “L4”
modes, and the center differential lock may not be able to be locked or
unlocked. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
523
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punctured.
If a tire is punctured: →P. 532
If none of the tires are punctured:
Turn the engine switch off then turn it to IGNITION ON mode. Check if the
tire pressure warning light comes on or flashes.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on
After the temperature of the tires has lowered sufficiently, check the
inflation pressure of each tire and adjust them to the specified level.
If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have
elapsed, check that the inflation pressure of each tire is at the specified
level and perform initialization. (→P. 472)
If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have
elapsed, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light flashes for 1 minute then stay on
There may be a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as
natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by tempera-
ture. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warn-
ing light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation
pressure of the spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire
is replaced with the spare tire, the tire pressure warning light does not
turn off. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper
tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a
few minutes.
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function
properly
→P. 476
■ Changing the engine oil
Make sure to reset oil change system.
1
2
524
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location
or audio sound.
WARNING
■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota
dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the
ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
■
If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired
by the nearest Toyota dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
525
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
WARNING
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a dif-
ferent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warn-
ing system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunc-
tion indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
527
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is cur-
rently being displayed on the multi-
information display.
Multi-information display
Handling method
Follow the instructions of the mes-
sage on the multi-information dis-
play.
If any of the warning messages are shown again after the following
actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.
The multi-information display shows warnings of system mal-
functions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that
indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is shown,
perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.
1
2
3
528
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending
on the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for
inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
*: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display.
Messages and warnings
System
warning
light
Warning
buzzer
*
Warning
Comes on Comes on Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such
as when a system related to driving is
malfunctioning or that danger may
result if the correction procedure is not
performed
Comes on ⎯ Sounds
⎯
Comes on
or flashes
Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such
as when the systems shown on the
multi-information display may be mal-
functioning
Flashes ⎯ Sounds
Indicates a situation, such as when
damage to the vehicle or danger may
result
Comes on ⎯
Does not
sound
Indicates a condition, such as mal-
function of electrical components, their
condition, or indicates the need for
maintenance
Flashes ⎯
Does not
sound
Indicates a situation, such as when an
operation has been performed incor-
rectly, or indicates how to perform an
operation correctly
529
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
■ System warning lights
The master warning light does not come on or flash in the following case.
Instead, a separate system warning light will come on along with a message
or image shown on the multi-information display.
● Indicates that the PCS (Pre-Collision System) is not currently functional
The PCS warning light flashes or illuminates. (→P. 519)
● Indicates that a door is not fully closed while the vehicle is stopped.
The Open door warning light comes on. (→P. 520)
■ If “See Owner’s Manual” is shown
● If “Smart key System Malfunction” is shown, this may be a malfunction.
Immediately have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● If “Transmission Fluid Temp High” is shown, it indicates that the automatic
transmission fluid temperature is too high.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, shift the shift lever to P and
wait until the warning message and light go off. If the warning message and
light go off, you may start the vehicle again. If the warning message and
light do not go off, contact your Toyota dealer.
■ If “Shift to P Before Exiting Vehicle” is shown
Message is displayed when the driver’s door is opened without turning the
engine switch to off with the shift lever in any position other than P.
Shift the shift lever to P.
■ If “Power Turned Off to Save Battery” is shown
Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function.
Next time when starting the engine, increase the engine speed slightly and
maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery.
■ When a message that indicates the need for the shift lever operation is
shown
To prevent the shift lever from being operated incorrectly or the vehicle from
moving unexpectedly, a message that requires shifting the shift lever may be
shown on the multi-information display. In that case, follow the instruction of
the message and shift the shift lever.
■ When “Headlight System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on
the multi-information display
The following systems may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
● The LED headlight system
● The automatic headlight leveling system
● Automatic High Beam (if equipped)
530
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
■ If “Forward Camera System Unavailable” or “Forward Camera System
Unavailable Clean Windshield” is displayed. (→P. 253, 518) (if equipped)
The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the
message is resolved.
● PCS (Pre-Collision System)
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
● Dynamic radar cruise control
● Automatic High Beam
■ If “Engine Oil Level Low” is shown
Indicates that engine oil level is low.
Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary.
This message may appear if the vehicle is stopped on a slope.
Move the vehicle to a level surface and check to see if the message disap-
pears.
■ If a following message is shown, take appropriate action and confirm
that the message has disappeared. (→P. 290)
●
“Crawl Not Available Select L4 and Shift to [D] or [R] Position”
● “Crawl Not Available Check System Operation Conditions”
● “Turn Assist Function Not Available Check System Operation Conditions”
● “Turn Assist Function Not Available Activate Crawl Control”
■ If “Maintenance Required Soon” is shown (U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the mainte-
nance schedule
* should be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the message has been
reset.
If necessary, perform maintenance.
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■ If “Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer” is shown (U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance
on the maintenance schedule
*.
Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the message has been
reset. (The indicator will not work properly unless the message has been
reset.)
Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the message after the
maintenance is performed (→P. 448)
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
531
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required Soon” is shown
Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed. (The indicator will
not work properly unless the message has been reset.)
Check the engine oil, and change if necessary. After changing the engine oil,
the message should be reset. (→P. 460)
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer” is shown
Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. (The indicator will not work
properly unless the message has been reset.)
Check and change the engine oil, and oil filter by your Toyota dealer. After
changing the engine oil, the message should be reset. (→P. 460)
■ If “Visit Your Dealer” is shown
The system or part shown on the multi-information display is malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location
or audio sound.
532
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers. (→P. 508)
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be
replaced with the spare tire.
For details about tires: →P. 471
WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the vehicle
534
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off
the jack, leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the
jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle will be injured.
■ Using the jack handle
Tighten all the jack handle bolts securely using a Phillips-head screw-
driver, to prevent the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.
536
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Assembling the jack handle.
Remove the jack handle and the jack handle extension bar from the
tool box and assemble by following these steps.
Loosen the screw using a
screwdriver.
Assemble the jack handle and
the jack handle extension bar
and tighten the screw.
Check that the screw is firmly
tightened.
Open the cover.
Taking out the spare tire
1
2
537
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
Insert the jack handle extension
into the lowering screw.
Lower
Raise
Place a rag under the jack
handle extension to protect the
back door.
Lower the spare tire completely
to the ground.
Pull out the spare tire and
remove the holding bracket.
Remove the spare wheel cover.
3
1
2
4
5
6
538
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Chock the tires.
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Replacing a flat tire
1
Flat tire Wheel chock position
Front
Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear
Left-hand side
In front of the front right-hand side
tire
Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire
2
539
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
Assembling the jack handle.
Remove the jack handle, jack extension bar and jack handle bar
from the tool box and assemble by following these steps.
Loosen the bolt and the screw
using either the jack handle end
or a screwdriver.
Assemble the jack handle
extension bar and the jack han-
dle bar and tighten the bolts.
Check that the bolts are firmly
tightened.
Assemble the jack handle
extension bar and the jack han-
dle and tighten the screw.
Check that the screw is firmly
tightened.
3
540
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Position the jack at the jack
points as shown.
Front
Under the chassis frame side
rail
Rear
Under the rear axle housing
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
4
1
2
5
6
541
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
WARNING
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury:
• Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it
from under the vehicle.
• Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in
handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immedi-
ately after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area
around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with
hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result
in burns.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 97 ft•lbf
(131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off
the wheel while the vehicle is moving.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifi-
cally designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the
tapered ends facing inward. (→P. 484)
542
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each nut by hand to
approximately the same
amount.
Turn the lug nuts until the wash-
ers come into contact with the
disc wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown
in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)
Installing the spare tire
1
Washer
Disc wheel
2
3
4
543
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
Reinstall the wheel ornament.
Remove the center wheel orna-
ment from the flat tire by pushing
from the reverse side, and rein-
stall it.
Lay down the tire with the valve
stem facing up, and install the
spare wheel cover.
5
WARNING
■ Stowing the flat tire
Failure to follow steps listed under stowing the tire may result in damage
to the spare tire carrier and loss of the tire, which could result in death or
serious injury.
Stowing the flat/spare tire, jack and tools
1
544
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Install the holding bracket,
inserting the claw into the wheel
lug nut hole. Turn the jack han-
dle extension clockwise to take
up slack in the chain.
Then, check to ensure the claw is
in the wheel lug nut hole and the
holding bracket is centered in the
wheel hub.
Holding bracket
Claw
Raise the tire.
While raising, pull the tire
towards the rear of the vehicle,
taking care that the tire goes up
without catching on any sur-
rounding part, to prevent it from
flying forward during a collision or
sudden braking.
After the tire goes half way up,
check that the suspended chain
is able to enter the tire hole, for
proper storage.
Tightening torque:
33.2 ft•lbf (45 N•m, 4.6 kgf•m)
Confirm that the tire is not loose
after tightening:
Push and pull the tire
Try rotating
Visually check to ensure the
tire is not hung on surrounding
parts.
If looseness or misassembly exists, repeat step and step .
Repeat step , any time the tire is lowered or disturbed.
incorrect
correct
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3 4
5 4
545
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
Stow the tools and jack securely.
■ After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 472)
WARNING
■ After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in
their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a
collision or sudden braking.
■ Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with power back door
In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power
back door main switch (→P. 116). Failure to do so may cause the back
door to operate unintentionally if the power back door switch is acciden-
tally touched, resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured.
NOTICE
■ When stowing the flat tire
Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle
underbody.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 472)
6
546
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.
(→P. 199)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(→P. 73)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 551)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical
problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an interim
measure is available to start the engine. (→P. 547)
If the engine will not start even though correct starting proce-
dures are being followed (→P. 199), consider each of the follow-
ing points:
The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates
normally.
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and head-
lights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low
volume.
The starter motor does not turn over.
547
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 551)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair
procedures are unknown.
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning
normally.
Set the parking brake.
Put the shift lever in P.
Set the engine switch to the ACCESSORY mode.
Push and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while
depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and head-
lights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
Emergency start function
1
2
3
4
548
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate
properly
Use the mechanical key (→P. 103)
in order to perform the following
operations (driver’s door only):
Locks all the doors
Closes the windows and moon
roof* (turn and hold)
Unlocks the doors
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
Opens the windows and moon roof* (turn and hold)
*: These settings must be customized at your Toyota dealer.
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is
interrupted (→P. 128) or the electronic key cannot be used
because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and
wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the
doors can be opened and the engine can be started by follow-
ing the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions
1
2
3
4
549
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
Touch the area behind the but-
tons on the electronic key to the
engine switch.
When the electronic key is
detected, a buzzer sounds and the
engine switch will turn to IGNITION
ON mode.
When the smart key system is
deactivated in customization set-
ting, the engine switch will turn to
ACCESSORY mode.
Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that is shown on
the multi-information display.
Press the engine switch.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Toyota
dealer.
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when
stopping the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(→P. 487)
■ Alarm
Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system.
If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set,
the alarm may be triggered. (→P. 75)
■ Changing engine switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press the engine switch in step above. The
engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is
pressed. (→P. 200)
■ When the electronic key does not work properly
● Make sure that the smart key system has not been deactivated in the cus-
tomization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features: →P. 582)
● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function.
(→P. 128)
Starting the engine
1
2
3
4
3
550
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or
moon roof
Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that
there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts
caught in the window or moon roof.
Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for
children and other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon
roof.
551
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12 volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following the
steps below.
Confirm that the electronic key
is being carried.
When connecting the jumper
(or booster) cables, depending
on the situation, the alarm may
activate and doors locked.
(→P. 77)
Open the hood.
Connecting the jumper cables.
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle.
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicles as shown
in the illustration.
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the
battery is discharged.
You can also call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
552
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Open and close any of the doors with the engine switch off.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start your
vehicle’s engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in
the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ Avoiding a discharged battery
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running
at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-
tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may
discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges
automatically during driving.)
■ When the battery is removed or discharged
The power back door (if equipped) must be initialized. (
→P. 119)
WARNING
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it
is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended termi-
nal.
● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” ter-
minals.
● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near
the battery.
4
5
6
7
553
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
WARNING
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● If the battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately
wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan
or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
554
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning sys-
tem, and then stop the engine.
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and
radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fans
If a large amount of coolant
leaks, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer.
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (→P. 85)
enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For
example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
● Steam is coming from under the hood.
Correction procedures
1
2
3
1
2
555
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines
on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“F”
“L”
Radiator cap
Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if coolant is unavailable.
Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check
that the air conditioning condenser cooling fans operate and to
check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.
The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immedi-
ately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the
fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air condition-
ing system on and off repeatedly.
(The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.
If the fans are operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
556
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from
the fans and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be
caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap or the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine and radiator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could
spray out.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding
cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust
etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.
557
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels
to help provide traction.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and release the parking
brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator
pedal.
■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow:
Press to turn off Active TRAC.
1
2
3
4
5
558
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
WARNING
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the
surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes
free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
● When a warning message for the automatic transmission fluid temperature
is displayed while attempting to free a stuck vehicle, immediately remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal and wait until the warning message
disappears. Otherwise, the transmission may become damaged.
(→P. 527)
559
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8
Vehicle specifications
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 560
Fuel information................ 568
Tire information................. 571
8-2. Customization
Customizable features...... 582
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ............... 593
560
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
*
1
: Unladen vehicle
*
2
: Vehicles without roof rail and cross rail
*
3
: Vehicles with roof rail and cross rail
Dimensions and weights
Overall length 196.5 in. (4990 mm)
Overall width 78.0 in. (1980 mm)
Overall height*
1
74.0 in. (1880 mm)*
2
76.2 in. (1935 mm)*
3
Wheelbase 112.2 in. (2850 mm)
Tread
Front 65.0 in. (1650 mm)
Rear 64.8 in. (1645 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
1320 lb. (600 kg)
TWR (trailer weight +
cargo weight)
With brake 8100 lb. (3675 kg)
Without
brake
1000 lb. (454 kg)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
561
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for
your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your
Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Cer-
tification Label.
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped
on the engine block as shown.
Vehicle identification
562
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
Engine
Model 5.7L V8 (3UR-FE)
Type 8-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.70 × 4.02 in. (94.0 × 102.0 mm)
Displacement 345.6 cu.in. (5663 cm
3
)
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 87 (Research octane number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
24.5 gal. (93 L, 20.4 Imp.gal)
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill — refer-
ence
*)
With filter
Without filter
7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp.qt.)
7.5 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
563
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toy-
ota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice
for good fuel economy and
good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is
operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee
(ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
Outside temperature
564
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
Cooling system
Capacity 17.1 qt. (16.2 L, 14.3 Imp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-
nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO SK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage at 68°F
(20°C):
12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the
engine and all lights turned off.)
Charging rates 5 A max.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
565
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Oil” at the
factory.
Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equiva-
lent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact
your Toyota dealer for further details.
The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary,
contact your Toyota dealer.
*: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” at
the factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” or
an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please
contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
Differential
Oil capacity
Front 2.01 qt. (1.90 L, 1.67 Imp.qt.)
Rear 4.44 qt. (4.20 L, 3.70 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity 10.7 qt. (10.1 L, 8.9 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied
by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Transfer
Oil capacity 1.53 qt. (1.45 L, 1.28 Imp.qt.)
Oil type*
Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF or
equivalent
Recommended oil viscosity SAE 75W
566
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
*
1
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N,
50 kgf) while the engine is running.
*
2
: Parking brake lever travel when pulled with a force of 45 lbf (200 N,
20 kgf).
Brakes
Pedal clearance*
1
4.49 in. (114 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1.0 ⎯ 6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear
limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake adjustment*
2
5 ⎯ 7 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
Chassis lubrication
Propeller shafts
Spider Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Slide
yoke
Molybdenum-disulfide lithium base chassis
grease, NLGI No.2 or lithium base chassis
grease, NLGI No.2
Steering
Free play Less than 1.18 in. (30 mm)
Power steering fluid type
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON
®
II or
III
Tires and wheels
Tire size 285/60R18 116V
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front tires:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear tires:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare tire:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size 18 × 8 J
Wheel nut torque 97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
567
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
A: Wedge base bulbs
B: Double end bulbs
Light bulbs
Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type
Exterior
Front turn signal lights 7444NA 28 A
Front side marker lights ⎯ 5 A
Rear turn signal lights ⎯ 21 A
Back-up lights 921 16 A
License plate lights ⎯ 5 A
Interior Vanity lights ⎯ 2 B
568
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
Fuel information
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gaso-
line you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed
a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC),
which is expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to
clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concen-
tration program.
● Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For
more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers,
please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.
■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as
reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically
acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.
Toyota recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced
vehicle emissions.
You must only use unleaded gasoline.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87
may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to
engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A..
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
569
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this
happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Toyota dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerat-
ing or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
● Use only gasoline containing up to 15%
ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 15% etha-
nol, including from any pump labeled
E30, E50, E85 (which are only some
examples of fuel containing more than
15% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline
containing more than
15% ethanol.
(30% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
570
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be
damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic
converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the
level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is
encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that
type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
571
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
Tire information
Tire size (→P. 573)
Summer tires or all season tires (→P. 475)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S”
is a summer tire.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (→P. 572)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Location of treadwear indicators (→P. 471)
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 577)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 577)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire.
A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL”
is a bias-ply tire.
Typical tire symbols
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
572
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
Manufacturer’s code
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Type A Type B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
573
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use (P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Tire size
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
575
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
576
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissi-
pate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
577
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which
a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall
of the tire
Recommended infla-
tion pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded vehi-
cle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1
*
that follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1
* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy
duty battery, and special trim
578
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer’s designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its share of
the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and
dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its share of
curb weight, accessory weight, and normal
occupant weight (distributed in accordance
with Table 1
* below), and dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between compo-
nents in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate
angles substantially less than 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Tire related term Meaning
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
579
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber
compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and
the tire is designed to fit on the underside of
the rim in a manner that encloses the rim
flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
metrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as pri-
marily intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Tire related term Meaning
580
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall,
or innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including ele-
vations due to labeling, decorations, or protec-
tive bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars,
multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks,
that have a gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adja-
cent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-
vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-
tive bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Tire related term Meaning
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
581
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
*: Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-
1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight
Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and
which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( )
on at least one sidewall
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Tire related term Meaning
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution
in a normally loaded
vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
582
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-2. Customization
Customizable features
When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked
in a safe place with the shift lever in P and the parking brake set.
■ Changing by using the navigation system
Press the “SETUP” button on the navigation system.
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can
be changed for details.
■ Changing by using the multi-information display
Use the meter control switches to select on the multi-infor-
mation display.
Choose the desired item using , and then press .
Select the desired setting by operating , and then press
.
To stop the selection, press to return to the previous screen.
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be
personalized to suit your preferences. The settings of these fea-
tures can be changed by using the navigation system, the multi-
information display, or at your Toyota dealer.
Customizing vehicle features
1
2
1
2
3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
583
8-2. Customization
8
Vehicle specifications
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other func-
tions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
Settings that can be changed using the navigation system
Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display
Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, – =Not available
■
Smart key system (→P. 126)
■ Wireless remote control (→P. 102)
*: If equipped
Customizable features
1
2
3
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Smart key system On Off O — O
Smart door unlocking Driver’s door All the doors O — O
1 2 3
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Wireless remote control On Off — — O
Unlocking operation
Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
O — O
Power back door opera-
tion
*
Push and hold
One short push
— — OPush twice
Off
Alarm (panic mode) On Off — — O
1 2 3
584
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-2. Customization
■ Smart key system (→P. 126) and wireless remote control
(→P. 102)
■ Door lock (→P. 106)
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Operation signal (Emer-
gency flashers)
On Off
O — O
Time elapsed before
automatic door lock
function is activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
60 seconds
Off
O — O
30 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Buzzers)
5
Off
O — O
1 to 7
Open door warning
function (when locking
the vehicle)
On Off
— — O
1 2 3
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Unlocking using a
mechanical key
Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
— — O
Automatic door lock
Shifting the shift
lever to position
other than P
Off
O — O
Vehicle speed is
approximately
12 mph
(20 km/h) or
higher
Automatic door unlock
Shifting the shift
lever to P
Off
O — O
Driver’s door is
opened
1 2 3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
585
8-2. Customization
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Power back door*
1
(→P. 114)
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: In this case, the power back door operation using the wireless remote
control can also be made only by pushing and holding.
*
3
: In this case, the power back door operation using the wireless remote
control can also be made only by pushing twice.
*
4
: The back door can be opened using the wireless remote control after
unlocking the back door.
■
Power windows (→P. 157)
*: The settings of the moon roof are changed in conjunction with the settings
of the power windows.
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Power back door switch
operation
Push and hold One short push — — O
Back door opener
switch automatic open
function
On Off — — O
Operation signal Off On — — O
Wireless remote control
linked operation (one
motion)
On*
2
On (Push
twice)
*
3
— — O
Off*
2, 4
1 2 3
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Mechanical key linked
operation (close)
*
Off On — — O
Mechanical key linked
operation (open)
*
Off On — — O
Wireless remote control
linked operation (open)
*
Off On — — O
Power windows open
warning buzzer
On Off
— — O
Buzzer sounds if oper-
ated using wireless
remote control
On Off
— — O
1 2 3
586
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-2. Customization
■ Moon roof (→P. 161)
*: The settings of the power windows are changed in conjunction with the set-
tings of the moon roof.
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Mechanical key linked
operation (open)
*
Off On — — O
Mechanical key linked
operation (close)
*
Off On — — O
Linked operation of
components when door
key is used
Slide only Tilt only — — O
Wireless remote control
linked operation (open)
*
Off On — — O
Linked operation of
components when wire-
less remote control
used
Slide only Tilt only — — O
Moon roof open warning
buzzer
On Off — — O
1 2 3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
587
8-2. Customization
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Illumination (→P. 399)
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Interior lights illumina-
tion control
On Off
— — O
Time period before the
interior lights turn off
15 seconds
Off
O — O7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation after the
engine switch is turned
off
On Off
— — O
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
On Off
— — O
Operation when you
approach the vehicle
with the electronic key
on your person (When
the interior light switch
is door position)
On Off
— — O
Footwell lights On Off — — O
Door trim lights and
footwell lights illumina-
tion control
On Off
— — O
Door trim lights On Off — — O
Sensitivity of the ambi-
ent light sensor used for
dimming the meter
lights etc.
Standard -2 to 2 — — O
Sensitivity of the ambi-
ent light sensor used for
brightening the meter
lights etc.
Standard -2 to 2 — — O
1 2 3
588
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-2. Customization
■ Automatic light control system (→P. 213)
■ Intuitive parking assist (→P. 278)
■ Automatic air conditioning system (→P. 380)
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Light sensor sensitivity Standard -2 to 2 O — O
Daytime running light
system
On Off
O — O
Time elapsed before
headlights automati-
cally turn off after doors
are closed
30 seconds
Off
O — O60 seconds
90 seconds
Welcome lighting illumi-
nation control
On Off
— — O
1 2 3
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Detection distance of
the rear center sensor
Far Near
O — O
Alert Volume (alert vol-
ume can be adjusted)
3 1 to 5
O — O
Display setting (when
intuitive parking assist is
operating)
All sensors dis-
played
Display off
O — O
1 2 3
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
A/C Auto switch opera-
tion
Auto Manual
O — O
1 2 3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
589
8-2. Customization
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Outside rear view mirrors (→P. 153)
■ Front seat heaters and ventilators (→P. 396)
■ Driving position memory (→P. 142)
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Automatic folding/
extending operation
Linked to lock-
ing/unlocking of
the doors
Off
— — O
Linked to engine
switch operation
Linked mirror function
when reversing
On Off
— — O
1 2 3
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Adjustment of the front
seat heater tempera-
ture or the ventilator fan
speed during automatic
operation (individual
seat adjustment avail-
able)
Level 3
(standard)
Level 1 (low) to
level 5 (high)
— — O
1 2 3
Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Selection the door link-
ing driving position
memory with door
unlock operation
Driver’s door All doors
— — O
1 2 3
590
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-2. Customization
■ Multi-information display (→P. 89)
*
1
: The default setting varies according to countries.
*
2
: Some status screens cannot be registered (indicated on the multi-informa-
tion display)
*
3
: 2 of the following items: current fuel consumption, average fuel economy
(after reset), average fuel economy (after refuel), average fuel economy
(after start), average vehicle speed (after reset), average vehicle speed
(after start), distance (driving range), distance (after start), elapsed time
(after reset), elapsed time (after start), blank
Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
Language
*
1
English
French
O O —
Spanish
Units*
1
miles
(MPG US)
miles
(MPG Imperial)
O O —
km (L/100 km)
km (km/L)
Eco Driving Indicator Light On Off — O –
switch settings
Drive
information 1
Desired status
screen
*
2
— O —
Drive information screen
displayed on the first
screen of
(Drive information 1)
Current fuel
consumption
*
3
— O —
Average fuel
economy
(after reset)
Drive information screen
displayed on the second
screen of
(Drive information 2)
Distance
(range)
*
3
— O —
Average speed
(after reset)
Pop-up display On Off — O —
Accent color Color 1
Color 1 to
color 4
O O —
1 2 3
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
591
8-2. Customization
8
Vehicle specifications
■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert)* (→P. 254)
*: If equipped
■
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)* (→P. 349)
*: If equipped
Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
Alert sensitivity Standard High — O —
Vehicle sway warning On Off — O —
Vehicle sway warning
sensitivity
Standard
Low
— O —
High
1 2 3
Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) On Off — O —
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert function)
On Off — O —
Outside rear view mirror
indicator brightness
Bright Dim — — O
Alert timing for presence
of approaching vehicle
(BSM function only)
Intermediate
Early
— — O
Late
Only when in
blind spot
RCTA buzzer volume Level 2
Level 1
— — O
Level 3
1 2 3
592
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-2. Customization
■ Vehicle customization
● If the smart key system is turned off, unlock door cannot be selected.
● If the doors are not opened after unlocking and are then automatically re-
locked, a signal will be given if Operation signal (Emergency flashers) or
Operation signal (Buzzer) are set to on.
■ When setting using the multi-information display
When using the multi-information display to set an item that can also be set
using the navigation system, the item displayed on the navigation system will
not change immediately.
If the engine switch is first turned off, the screen display will change once the
engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode again.
■ When customizing using the navigation system
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift
lever to P. Also, to prevent battery discharge, leave the engine running while
customizing the features.
WARNING
■ During customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the
vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may
collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while cus-
tomizing features.
593
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
8-3. Initialization
8
Vehicle specifications
Items to initialize
*: If equipped
The following item must be initialized for normal system opera-
tion after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or main-
tenance being performed on the vehicle:
Item When to initialize Reference
Message indicating mainte-
nance is required
After the maintenance is per-
formed
P. 449
Tire pressure warning sys-
tem
• When rotating the tires on
vehicles differing with front
and rear tire inflation pres-
sures.
• When changing the tire
inflation pressure by
changing traveling speed
or load weight, etc.
• When changing the tire
size.
P. 472
Power back door*
• After reconnecting or
changing the battery with
power back door opened
• After changing a fuse with
power back door opened
P. 119
Multi-terrain Monitor*
After reconnecting or chang-
ing the battery
P. 299
Engine oil maintenance
data
*
After the maintenance is per-
formed
P. 460
596
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-
331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www .safercar .gov ;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Wash-
ington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar .gov.
597
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Index
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting).................... 598
Alphabetical index ..................... 602
For vehicles with a navigation system or a multimedia
system, refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL” for information regarding the equipment listed
below.
• Navigation system
• Audio/video system
• Rear seat entertainment system
• Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
598
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
● If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be
made by your Toyota dealer. (→P. 103)
● If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases signifi-
cantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. (→P. 105)
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (→P. 487)
● Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (→P. 200)
● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio
wave. (→P. 128)
● Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is
set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector
lock. (→P. 109)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting
your Toyota dealer.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
The rear door cannot be opened
599
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
● Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?
(→P. 199)
● Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 201)
● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (→P. 127)
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P. 202)
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (→P. 549)
● Is the battery discharged? (→P. 551)
● Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
engine switch in IGNITION ON mode (→P. 209)
● It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (→P. 202)
● Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be oper-
ated if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P. 157)
If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress
the brake pedal
The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is
stopped
The windows do not open or close by operating the power
window switches
600
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
● The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for a period of
time. (→P. 201)
● The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts?
(→P. 520)
● The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (→P. 212)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.
(→P. 518, 527)
● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P. 75)
To stop the alarm, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode or start the
engine.
The engine switch is turned off automatically
A warning buzzer sounds during driving
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds
601
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle or the moon roof opened?
Check the message on the multi-information display. (→P. 527)
● When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to
P. 518, 527.
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare
tire. (→P. 532)
● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or
snow. (→P. 557)
A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes stuck
602
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Alphabetical index
A/C ....................................380, 391
Air conditioning filter .............485
Changing the rear seat
settings...............................384
Front automatic air
conditioning system............380
Micro dust and pollen filter....386
Rear air conditioning
system................................391
ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System)..................................363
Function................................363
Warning light.........................519
Active head restraint...............133
Active TRAC.............................363
Air cleaner................................456
Air conditioning filter..............485
Air conditioning
system............................380, 391
Air conditioning filter .............485
Changing the rear seat
settings...............................384
Front automatic air
conditioning system............380
Micro dust and pollen filter....386
Rear air conditioning
system................................391
Airbags....................................... 38
Airbag operating conditions....46
Airbag precautions for
your child.............................. 41
Airbag warning light.............. 518
Correct driving posture........... 28
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions............. 46
Curtain shield airbag
precautions........................... 44
Front passenger occupant
classification system............ 50
General airbag precautions....41
Locations of airbags...............38
Modification and disposal
of airbags ............................. 45
Side airbag operating
conditions............................. 46
Side airbag precautions..........43
Side and curtain shield
airbags operating
conditions............................. 46
Side and curtain shield
airbags precautions.............. 44
SRS airbags ........................... 38
Alarm.......................................... 75
Alarm...................................... 75
Warning buzzer .................... 518
Anchor brackets........................62
Antenna
Smart key system................. 126
A
603
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS)......................................363
Function................................363
Warning light.........................519
Approach warning
Dynamic radar cruise
control.................................270
Armrest.....................................426
Assist grips..............................427
Audio input
*
Audio system*
Automatic air conditioning
system
Air conditioning filter .............485
Automatic air conditioning
system................................380
Automatic door locking and
unlocking systems................110
Automatic headlight leveling
system....................................215
Function................................215
Automatic High Beam.............217
Automatic light control
system....................................215
Automatic transmission ......... 205
2nd start switch..................... 206
Downshift restriction
warning buzzer................... 209
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P..................... 209
S mode.................................207
AUX port
*
Auxiliary boxes........................ 409
Back door................................. 114
Back door handle.................. 117
Jam protection function ........ 119
Power back door................... 117
Wireless remote control........106
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ............500
Wattage................................ 567
Battery...................................... 467
Battery checking................... 467
If the vehicle battery
is discharged...................... 551
Preparing and checking
before winter ......................375
Voltmeter................................ 85
Warning light.........................518
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)....... 349
Bluetooth
®
*
B
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
604
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Bluetooth
®
audio*
Bluetooth
®
phone*
Bottle holders ..........................408
Brake
Fluid......................................566
Parking brake........................212
Warning light.........................518
Brake assist .............................363
Break-in tips.............................167
Brightness control
Instrument panel light
control...................................86
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).......349
Blind Spot Monitor
function...............................353
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
function...............................357
Care...................................442, 445
Aluminum wheels..................442
Exterior .................................442
Interior...................................445
Radar sensor........................352
Seat belts..............................446
Cargo capacity......................... 181
Cargo hooks ............................ 410
CD player
*
Chains ...................................... 376
Child restraint system...............57
Booster seat definition............ 58
Booster seat installation ......... 67
Convertible definition.............. 58
Convertible installation ........... 65
Front passenger occupant
classification system............ 50
Infant seat/convertible seat
definition............................... 58
Infant seat/convertible seat
installation............................ 64
Installing CRS with LATCH
system.................................. 63
Installing CRS with
seat belt................................ 64
Installing CRS with top
tether strap........................... 68
LATCH system .......................63
C
605
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Child safety................................56
Airbag precautions..................41
Back door precautions..........120
Battery precautions.......468, 553
Child-protectors ....................109
Child restraint system.............57
How your child should
wear the seat belt.................34
Installing child restraints .........62
Moon roof precautions..........164
Power window lock switch....157
Power window
precautions.........................160
Rear door child-protectors....109
Removed key battery
precautions.........................488
Safety information...................56
Seat belt extender
precautions...........................37
Seat belt precautions..............36
Seat heater precautions........395
Child-protectors.......................109
Cleaning ...........................442, 445
Aluminum wheels..................442
Exterior .................................442
Interior...................................445
Radar sensor........................352
Seat belts..............................446
Clock.........................................415
Coat hooks...............................426
Compass ....................................89
Condenser................................464
Console box.............................404
Coolant
Capacity................................564
Checking...............................463
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................375
Cool box...................................412
Cooling system........................463
Engine overheating...............554
Crawl Control........................... 290
Cruise control
Cruise control .......................275
Dynamic radar cruise
control ................................ 263
Cup holders ............................. 406
Curtain shield airbags............... 38
Customizable features............ 582
Daytime running light
system.................................... 215
Defogger
Outside rear view
mirrors................................386
Rear window......................... 386
Windshield............................385
Differential................................ 565
Dimension................................ 560
Dinghy towing.......................... 198
Display
Drive information ....................92
Dynamic radar cruise
control ................................ 263
Fuel consumption
information ........................... 98
Intuitive parking assist.......... 279
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert)................................... 258
Multi-information display.........89
Warning messages............... 527
D
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
606
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Do-it-yourself maintenance....455
Door courtesy lights
Location................................399
Doors
Automatic door locking and
unlocking system................110
Back door..............................114
Door glasses.........................157
Door lock...............................106
Open door warning buzzer ...520
Open door warning light........520
Outside rear view mirrors......153
Rear door child-protectors....109
Side doors.............................106
Drive information.......................92
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light.........................................520
Driver’s seat position
memory..................................142
Driving......................................166
Break-in tips..........................167
Correct posture.......................28
Driving in the rain..................167
Off-road precautions.............370
Procedures ...........................166
Winter drive tips....................375
Driving position memory ........142
Driving position memory.......142
Memory recall function..........143
Dynamic radar cruise
control....................................263
Function................................263
Eco Driving Indicator................ 96
EDR (Event data recorder)........10
Electronic key.......................... 102
Battery-saving function......... 128
If the electronic key does
not operate properly...........548
Replacing the battery............ 487
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer
sounds................................518
If a warning light
turns on.............................. 518
If a warning message
is displayed ........................527
If the electronic key does
not operate properly...........548
If the engine will not start......546
If the vehicle has
discharged battery..............551
If you have a flat tire.............532
If you lose your keys..... 103, 105
If you think something is
wrong ................................. 516
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 557
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency ......................... 509
If your vehicle needs to be
towed.................................. 510
If your vehicle overheats.......554
E
607
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Emergency flashers ................508
Engine
Accessory mode...................200
Air cleaner.............................456
Compartment........................458
Engine switch........................199
Exhaust gas precautions ........72
Hood.....................................457
How to start the engine.........199
Identification number ............561
If the engine will not start......546
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency..........................509
Ignition switch
(engine switch)...................199
Overheating..........................554
Engine compartment cover....459
Engine coolant.........................463
Capacity................................564
Checking...............................463
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................375
Engine coolant temperature
gauge........................................85
Engine immobilizer system......73
Engine oil .................................460
Capacity................................562
Checking...............................460
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................375
Engine switch
(ignition switch).....................199
Engine switch light
(ignition switch light)............399
Event data recorder (EDR)........10
Exhaust gas precautions..........72
First-aid kit holder................... 411
Flat tire ..................................... 532
Floor mats.................................. 26
Fluid
Automatic transmission ........ 565
Brake.................................... 566
Steering................................ 566
Washer................................. 470
Fog lights ................................. 222
Replacing light bulbs ............505
Switch................................... 222
Four-wheel drive system
Center differential
lock/unlock ......................... 287
Four-wheel drive control
switch................................. 286
Warning light.........................522
Front automatic air
conditioning system............. 380
Front doors.............................. 106
F
608
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Front passenger occupant
classification system..............50
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light.................520
Front seats ...............................133
Adjustment............................133
Cleaning................................445
Correct driving posture ...........28
Driving position memory.......142
Head restraints .....................146
Seat heaters .........................396
Seat position memory...........142
Seat ventilators.....................396
Front side marker lights..........213
Light switch...........................213
Replacing light bulbs.............497
Wattage ................................567
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............498
Turn signal lever...................211
Wattage ................................567
Fuel
Capacity................................562
Fuel gauge..............................85
Fuel pump shut off
system................................517
Gas station information.........620
Information............................568
Refueling...............................230
Type......................................562
Warning light.........................520
Fuel consumption
information.............................. 98
Fuel filler door ......................... 230
Opener.................................. 232
Refueling .............................. 230
Fuel pump shut off system..... 517
Fuses........................................ 489
Gas station information.......... 620
Garage door opener................ 428
Gauges....................................... 85
Glove box................................. 403
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)
*
Head restraints........................ 146
Headlight cleaner .................... 229
Headlights................................ 213
Automatic headlight
leveling...............................215
Automatic High Beam
system................................217
Headlight aim........................ 493
Light switch...........................213
Replacing light bulbs ............505
Heated steering wheel ............ 395
G
H
609
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Heaters
Front automatic air
conditioning system............380
Outside rear view mirrors......386
Seat heaters .........................396
High mounted stoplight
Replacing..............................505
Hill-start assist control............363
Hood .........................................457
Hooks
Cargo hooks .........................410
Coat hooks............................426
Retaining hooks
(floor mat).............................26
Horn..........................................149
I/M test......................................454
Identification
Engine...................................561
Vehicle..................................561
Ignition switch
(engine switch)......................199
Ignition switch light
(engine switch light) .............399
Illuminated entry system ........401
Immobilizer system...................73
Indicators ...................................80
Initialization
Items to initialize...................593
Maintenance.........................449
Power windows.....................159
Tire pressure warning
system................................473
Inside door handle light.......... 399
Inside rear view mirror............ 151
Instrument panel light
control...................................... 86
Interior lights ........................... 399
Switch................................... 400
Intuitive parking assist ...........278
Jack
Vehicle-equipped
jack..................................... 533
Jack handle..............................533
Jam protection function
Moon roof ............................. 162
Power back door opener
and closer...........................119
Power windows.....................158
I
J
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
610
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
KDSS (Kinetic Dynamic
Suspension System).............363
Keyless entry
Smart key system.................126
Wireless remote control........102
Keys..........................................102
Battery-saving function.........128
Electronic key .......................102
Engine switch........................199
If the electronic key does
not operate properly...........548
If you lose your keys.....103, 105
Key number plate..................102
Keyless entry........................102
Keys......................................102
Mechanical key.....................102
Replacing the battery............487
Warning buzzer.....................127
Kinetic dynamic suspension
system (KDSS) ......................363
Knee airbags..............................38
Language (multi-information
display)...................................590
LATCH system...........................63
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)....254
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever..............457
Hood lock release lever........457
Shift lever..............................205
Turn signal lever...................211
Wiper lever............................223
License plate lights
Light switch...........................213
Replacing light bulbs.............504
Wattage ................................567
Light
Automatic High Beam
system................................217
Door courtesy lights.............. 399
Engine switch light
(ignition switch light)...........399
Fog light switch..................... 222
Headlight switch ...................213
Illuminated entry system....... 401
Inside door handle lights.......399
Interior lights.........................400
Personal lights...................... 401
Replacing light bulbs ............495
Turn signal lever................... 211
Vanity lights..........................414
Wattage................................ 567
Light bulbs
Replacing.............................. 495
Wattage................................ 567
Lock steering column............. 202
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance.......................455
General maintenance...........451
Maintenance data................. 560
Maintenance
requirements...................... 448
Scheduled maintenance.......448
Malfunction indicator lamp.....518
K
L
M
611
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Meter...........................................85
Indicators................................80
Instrument panel light
control...................................86
Meters.....................................85
Multi-information display.........89
Warning lights.......................518
Warning messages...............527
Micro dust and pollen filter.....386
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror..........151
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers ...........................386
Outside rear view mirrors......153
Vanity mirrors........................414
Moon roof.................................161
Jam protection function.........162
Operation..............................161
MP3 disc
*
Multi-information display..........89
Display contents .....................89
Drive information.....................92
Dynamic radar cruise
control.................................263
Language..............................590
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert)...................................258
Switching the display..............91
Warning messages...............527
Multi-terrain ABS .....................363
Multi-terrain Monitor................299
Multi-terrain Select..................295
Navigation system
*
Noise from under vehicle ........... 8
Odometer ................................... 85
Off road precautions............... 370
Oil
Engine oil.............................. 562
Front differential oil...............565
Rear differential oil................565
Transfer oil............................ 565
Opener
Back door ............................. 115
Fuel filler door....................... 232
Hood..................................... 457
Outside rear view mirrors....... 153
Adjusting and folding............ 153
Blind Spot Monitor................349
Driving position memory.......142
Linked mirror function when
reversing ............................ 154
Mirror position memory......... 142
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers........................... 386
Outside temperature
display.................................... 415
Overheating, Engine ............... 554
N
O
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
612
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Panic mode ..............................103
Parking assist sensors
(intuitive parking assist).......278
Parking brake...........................212
Operation..............................212
Parking brake engaged
warning buzzer...................212
Parking lights...........................213
Light switch...........................213
Replacing light bulbs.............505
PCS (Pre-Collision system)....241
Enabling/disabling the
system................................245
Function................................241
Warning light.........................519
Personal lights.........................399
Switch...................................401
Power back door......................114
Power outlets...........................416
Power steering
Fluid......................................566
Power windows........................157
Jam protection function.........158
Operation..............................157
Window lock switch...............157
Pre-Collision system
(PCS) ......................................241
Enabling/disabling the
system................................245
Function................................241
Warning light.........................519
Radar cruise control
(dynamic radar cruise
control)................................... 263
Radiator.................................... 464
Radio
*
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert)....................................... 357
Rear air conditioning
system.................................... 391
Rear seat .................................. 135
Adjustment............................135
Folding up the third
seats................................... 138
Tumbling the second
seats................................... 136
Rear side marker lights........... 213
Light switch...........................213
Replacing light bulbs ............505
Rear step bumper.................... 117
Rear turn signal lights ............ 211
Replacing light bulbs ............502
Turn signal lever................... 211
Wattage................................ 567
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror.......... 151
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 153
Rear view monitor system
*
Rear window defogger............ 386
Rear window wiper.................. 227
Refueling.................................. 230
Capacity................................ 562
Fuel types............................. 562
Opening the fuel tank cap.....230
P
R
613
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Replacing
Electronic key battery ...........487
Fuses....................................489
Light bulbs ............................495
Tires......................................532
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners......................596
Resetting the message
indicating maintenance is
required..................................449
Roof luggage carrier ...............175
Safety Connect ........................435
Scheduled maintenance .........448
Seat belts....................................30
Adjusting the seat belt ............33
Automatic Locking
Retractor...............................34
Child restraint system
installation ............................62
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belt........................446
Emergency Locking
Retractor...............................34
How to wear your seat belt.....30
How your child should
wear the seat belt.................34
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use.........................35
Reminder light and
buzzer.................................520
Seat belt extender...................34
Seat belt pretensioners...........33
SRS warning light.................518
Seat heaters.............................396
Seat position memory.............142
Seat ventilators........................396
Seating capacity......................181
Seats................................. 133, 135
Adjustment.................... 133, 135
Adjustment
precautions................. 134, 141
Armrest.................................426
Child seats/child restraint
system installation................ 62
Cleaning ...............................445
Driving position memory.......142
Folding up the third
seats................................... 138
Front seats............................133
Head restraint....................... 146
Heaters................................. 395
Properly sitting in the seat......28
Seat heaters......................... 395
Seat position memory...........142
Seat ventilators..................... 395
Second seats........................135
Third seats............................ 135
Tumbling the second
seats................................... 136
Ventilators............................. 395
Sensor
Automatic headlight
system................................215
Automatic High Beam
system................................217
Inside rear view mirror.......... 152
Intuitive parking assist.......... 278
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert)................................... 254
Radar sensor........................ 236
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers................................. 225
Service reminder indicators..... 80
S
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
614
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Shift lever
Automatic transmission.........205
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P.....................209
Shift lock system.....................209
Side airbags ...............................38
Side doors................................106
Side marker lights ...................213
Light switch...........................213
Replacing light bulbs.....497, 505
Wattage ................................567
Side mirrors .............................153
Adjusting and folding ............153
Blind Spot Monitor ................349
Heaters.................................386
Mirror position memory.........142
Smart key system....................126
Antenna location...................126
Entry functions..............106, 114
Starting the engine................199
Snow tires ................................375
“SOS” button ...........................435
Spare tire
Inflation pressure..................566
Storage location....................533
Spark plug................................564
Specifications..........................560
Speedometer..............................85
SRS airbags ...............................38
Steering
Column lock release.............202
Fluid......................................566
Steering wheel.........................149
Adjustment............................149
Audio switches
*
Heated steering wheel..........396
Meter control switches............91
Telephone switches
*
Stop/tail lights
Replacing light bulbs ............505
Storage feature........................ 402
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 557
Sun visors................................ 414
Sunshade
Roof...................................... 162
Switch
Audio remote control
switches
*
Automatic High Beam
switch................................. 217
Center differential
lock/unlock switch ..............287
Clock adjustment buttons..... 415
Cruise control switch .... 263, 275
Door lock switch ................... 108
Driving position memory
switches ............................. 142
Emergency flashers
switch................................. 508
Engine switch .......................199
Fog light switch..................... 222
Four-wheel drive control
switch................................. 286
Garage door opener
switches ............................. 428
Headlight cleaner switch.......229
Heated steering wheel..........395
Interior light switch................ 400
Intuitive parking assist.......... 278
Ignition switch....................... 199
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert)................................... 257
Light switches....................... 213
615
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Meter control switches............91
Moon roof switches...............161
Outside rear view mirror
switches..............................153
Personal light switch.............401
Power back door switch........115
Power door lock switch.........108
Power window switch............157
Rear window wiper and
washer switch.....................227
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers switch ................386
Seat heater switches............396
Seat ventilator switches........396
“SOS” button.........................435
Talk switch
*
Telephone switches*
Tilt and telescopic steering
control switch......................149
Tire pressure warning
reset switch ........................473
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch .................................269
VSC OFF switch...................365
Window lock switch...............157
Windshield wipers and
washer switch.....................223
Wireless charger power
supply switch......................418
Tachometer................................ 85
Tail lights.................................. 213
Light switch...........................213
Replacing light bulbs ............505
Talk switch
*
Telephone switches*
Theft deterrent system
Alarm...................................... 75
Immobilizer system................. 73
Tire inflation pressure............. 480
Maintenance data................. 566
Warning light.........................520
Tire information....................... 571
Glossary ...............................577
Size....................................... 573
Tire identification number..... 572
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading .............................. 575
Tire pressure warning
system.................................... 472
Function................................ 472
Initializing.............................. 472
Installing tire pressure
warning valves and
transmitters ........................ 472
Registering ID codes............473
Tire pressure warning
reset switch........................ 473
Warning light.........................520
T
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
616
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Tires..........................................471
Chains...................................376
Checking...............................471
If you have a flat tire .............532
Inflation pressure..................480
Information............................571
Replacing..............................532
Rotating tires.........................471
Size.......................................566
Snow tires.............................375
Spare tire..............................532
Tire pressure warning
system................................472
Warning light.........................520
Tools.........................................533
Top tether strap .........................62
Total load capacity..................560
Towing
Dinghy towing.......................198
Emergency towing................510
Towing eyelet........................512
Trailer Sway Control.............364
Trailer towing........................182
Toyota Safety Sense P............234
TRAC (Traction Control) .........363
Trailer Sway Control................364
Trailer towing...........................182
Transmission
Automatic transmission.........205
Downshift restriction warning
buzzer.................................209
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P.....................209
Selecting a driving mode ......206
S mode .................................207
Trip information.........................98
Trip meters.................................85
Troubleshooting......................598
Turn signal lights .................... 211
Replacing light
bulbs................... 498, 502, 505
Turn signal lever................... 211
Wattage................................ 567
USB port
*
Utility vehicle precautions...... 370
Vanity lights............................. 414
Vanity lights..........................414
Wattage................................ 567
Vanity mirrors.......................... 414
Vehicle data recordings...... 9, 235
Vehicle identification
number................................... 561
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC)...................................... 363
Ventilators
(seat ventilators)................... 396
VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control).................................. 363
U
V
617
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
Warning buzzers......................518
Approach warning.................270
Brake system........................518
Downshifting.........................209
Driver’s seat belt
reminder.............................520
Intuitive parking assist ..........281
Lane departure.....................259
Master warning system.........520
Open back door....................520
Open door.............................520
Parking brake........................212
PCS ......................................519
Radar cruise control..............270
Seat belt reminder ................520
Warning lights..........................518
ABS.......................................519
Brake system........................518
Center differential lock..........522
Charging system...................518
Low fuel level........................520
Low speed four-wheel
drive....................................522
Malfunction indicator lamp....518
Master warning light..............520
Open door.............................520
Pre-collision system..............519
Seat belt reminder light.........520
Slip indicator.........................519
SRS ......................................518
Tire pressure.........................520
Warning messages..................527
Warning reflector holder......... 410
Washer ............................. 223, 227
Checking............................... 470
Preparing and checking
before winter ......................375
Switch........................... 223, 227
Washing and waxing............... 442
Weights
Cargo capacity...................... 181
Load limits............................181
Weights................................. 560
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ................. 598
Wheels...................................... 483
Replacing wheels ................. 532
Size....................................... 566
Window glasses ...................... 157
Window lock switch ................ 157
Windows
Power windows.....................157
Rear window defogger..........386
Washer......................... 223, 227
Windshield wiper de-icer........386
Windshield wipers................... 223
Intermittent windshield
wipers................................. 223
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers................................. 224
Winter driving tips................... 375
Wireless charger ..................... 418
Wireless remote control
key.......................................... 102
Battery-saving function......... 128
Locking/Unlocking ................ 102
Panic mode........................... 103
Replacing the battery............ 487
WMA disc
*
W
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
618
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
619
Alphabetical index
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
620
LC200_OM_OM60Q26U_(U)
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel filler door Auxiliary catch lever
P. 232 P. 457
Tire inflation
pressure
Fuel filler door opener
Hood lock release
lever
P. 566
P. 232 P. 457
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
24.5 gal. (93 L, 20.4 Imp.gal)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 562
Cold tire inflation
pressure
P. 566
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
With filter
Without filter
7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp.qt.)
7.5 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.)
Engine oil type
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
P. 562
